ENCLOSED SYSTEMS FOR
              TESTING MICROBIAL PEST
                  CONTROL AGENTS
          Dr. John A. Couch, Coordinator
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
        Environmental Research Laboratory
              Gulf Breeze, FL  32561
                   Prepared For
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
         Office of Pesticide Programs and
        Office of Research and Development
This document is a preliminary draft.  It has not
been formally released by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency and should not at this stage be
construed to represent Agency policy.  It is being
circulated for comments on its technical  merit and
policy implications.
        ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
        OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
       U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           GULF BREEZE, FLORIDA  32561

-------
                                                                 LIBRARY COPY
                                TABLE  OF CONTENTS

  I.   Organization of Workshop	   ii
 II.   Introduction 	    1
III.   Descriptions and Documentation  of Suggested Enclosed Systems  	    4
      1.   Estuanne Systems	    7
      2.   Freshwater Systems 	   67
      3.   Terrestrial Systems  	  134
 IV.   Recommendations of the Pathology-Microbiology Working Group   	  153
  V.   Attendees  and Participants, Their Addresses and Areas
      of  Expertise	157
                                     i WOPERfTYOP
                             ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY

-------
WORKING GROUPS

TERRESTRIAL SYSTEMS

Chairman - Ray Seidler



Lowell Etzel

Joe Gorsuch

Pete Van Voris
                                                ORGANIZATION OF WORKSHOP

                                              (WORKING  GROUPS AND EFFORTS)

                                                COORDINATOR - JOHN COUCH
                                            Environmental Research Laboratory
                                          Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561

                                       Office  of Pesticide Programs - ZIG VAITUZIS
                                   Office  of Research and Development - MORRIS LEVINE
     FRESHWATER

Chairman - Dick Anderson



     Gary L. Phipps

     Lyle Shannon

     Paul Franco
      ESTUARINE

Co-Chairman - Tom Duke

Co-Chairman - Ken Perez

      Steve Foss

      Fred Genthner

      Larry Goodman

      John Couch
 PATHOLOGY-MICROBIOLOGY

Chairman - Clint Kawanishi
      Paul Baumann

      Drion G. Boucias

      Max Summers

      Loy Volkman

-------
                               INTRODUCTION
                                    by
                              John A. Couch

Background
     This report stems from a workshop held at the EPA, Environmental
Research Laboratory, Gulf Breeze, Florida on February 18 and 19, 1986.
The workshop and report were requested by the Hazard Evaluation Division
of the Office of Pesticide Programs.
     The report consists of descriptions and documentation of some
enclosed, multispecies systems that may be used for laboratory testing  of
both natural and genetically altered microbial pest control  agents (MPCA's-
viruses, bacteria, fungi, and protozoa) for possible effects in nontarget
species, and ecosystems.
     Laboratory tests systems relative to estuarine, freshwater, and
terrestrial habitats, related species, and physical-chemical factors were
considered by the members of the four working groups (p. ii) and the workshop
as a whole.  Each working group wrote a section of this report relevant to
the needs for risks evaluations appropriate to their respective ecosystem
types (Sections III, 1, 2, and 3).
Goals and Attributes of Test Systems
     The purpose of this report is to provide specific recommendations  which
would permit properly trained biologists to construct an enclosed, laboratory
system to evaluate the effects of microbial pest control agents (MPCA's) at
several  levels of biological complexity.  These described systems may provide
the opportunity to examine possible effects of MPCA's in nontarget species
in regard to ecosystem function as it may be altered by such phenomena  as
gene transfer, persistence of agent, microbial metabolic perturbation,  or
                                    1

-------
changes in population and species compositions due to unexpected competition
or replacement.  Other, very important endpoints of great concern,  centered
below the ecosystem, species or population  levels may also be studied in
the suggested systems.  These primary effect endpoints,  such as infectivity.
pathogenicity, and toxicity are expressed via the modes  of action of most
MPCA's and may be studied in individuals of nontarget species selected to
inhabit the enclosed systems.  Therefore it may be feasible to study
possible activity of MPCA's at several biological/ecological levels in
these suggested test systems.
     The attributes of the test systems desired include:
     1.  Containabilityl
     2.  Reproducibility
     3.  A variety of trophic levels available in one or more of the systems
     4.  Reasonable cost and size
     5.  Capacity for testing viruses, bacteria, fungi and protozoa.
     Most of these attributes have been considered in the range of systems
suggested in this report for estuarine, freshwater, and terrestrial
conditions.
Qualifications of and Limitations on Systems Described Herein
     The enclosed systems described in this report are presented as
suggested systems in which to attempt to develop methods for examining
possible ecosystem and population level effects and impacts of MPCA's.
These systems have not been validated yet in terms of efficacy with either
^•Containability as used in this report means the reasonable containment
 necessary to prevent release of the microorganisms under study to the
 work place (laboratory) or larger environment.

-------
natural  or genetically engineered MPCA's.  They are presented here as a



few of many possible systems that may be adapted for testing MPCA's for



possible environmental impacts.



     A final  caveat is in order for those who may attempt to use these



suggested, described systems for use with MPCA's without due adaptation:



most of these suggested systems were developed to study the effects of



chemical toxicants; therefore the different nature and modes of actions



of MPCA's and chemicals must be taken into consideration if users of



these systems are going to successfully adapt them to MPCA testing and



study (See Section IV for further discussion on this point).



     Each of the system sections were authored by those listed on title



pages, and should be considered the results of the authors' effort and



expertise.  Further, each section or system description stands on its own



merits in that it represents the authors' expertise and viewpoints.

-------
                            ESTUARINE SYSTEMS
AUTHORS:



       John A. Couch



       Thomas W. Duke



       Steven S. Foss



       Kenneth T. Perez,

-------
                               PREAMBLE TO



                       MARINE AND ESTUARINE SYSTEMS





     Three types of marine microcosms were identified to establish  the



potential environmental risks of genetically engineered and indigenous



microorganisms.  Specifically, simple, gnotobiotic and simulative systems



(see table) vary from simple, two or more species systems to complex,



interacting natural assemblages, respectively.  The general underlying



assumption was that the greater the physical and biological complexity



of the experimental system, the greater the likelihood of observing



ecological effects and ultimate fate of the test microorganism.   In



addition, the ability to relate ecosystem effects to natural marine



environments was assumed to be directly related to the complexity of



environmental simulation- »The converse is probably valid for determining



specific effects in individual, nontarget organisms, i.e., infectivity,



pathogenicity; and toxicity endpoints are more optimally dealt with in



simpler, single species tests.



     In  this section, a simple and two simulative systems are described;



to the best of our knowledge, appropriate gnotobiotic systems in the marine



area have not been developed.  The simple system does not attempt to



simulate any marine environment, but rather contains selected, trophically



important species to which the test microorganism can be exposed through



the surrounding seawater medium.  The two simulative systems, the seagrass



microcosm and the coastal microcosm, relate to shallow intertidal and



deeper water marine environments, respectively.



     The level of containment of the test microorganism will be dependent



upon whether the microbe is natural, i.e., derived originally in the

-------
natural environment or genetically engineered, i.e., an organism altered or



manipulated anthropogenically and, as a result, not found in natural



environments.  If the former, then the containment procedures will  not be



as stringent as those for the latter.  Each system has either explicitly



or implicitly addressed the degree of containment relative to the type of



microorganism tested.

-------
                 General  Characteristics and Properties of "Microcosms"

                     or Multispecies Test Systems Currently in Use
Microcosm"
  Type
      Components
    Configuration of
       Components
   External
   Exchange
  Conditions
imple
>_ 2 species; water, food,
  or air only as exposure
  medium; artificial
  medium (e.g. filtered
  or nutrient enriched
  water).
Direct or indirect
species interaction
via medium (e.g., air or
water, etc.).  Simulation
conditions investigator
dependent (e.g., water
turbulence, air flow rates,
etc.).
 Usually static;
 completely
 contained
inotobiotic    _>_ 2 trophically re-
                lated species chosen
                by investigator;
                sometimes water and
                soils/sediments
                artificial media {e.g.
                nutrient enriched*water
                screened and/or steri-
                lized soils, etc.).
                            All species and media
                            capable of direct and
                            indirect interactions;
                            simulation conditions
                            investigator dependent.
                               Static or man-
                               ipulated flow-
                               through (e.g.
                               nutrient addi-
                               tions, artificial
                               predation, etc.).
Simulative
  » 2 species; natural
  intact biotic assem-
  blages taken from field;
  natural and unmanipu-
  lated media.
All species and media
capable of direct and
indirect interactions,
simulation conditions
dependent upon natural
system being simulated.
Unmanipulated
flow-through or
static based upon
turnover time of
natural system
being simulated
as situation
requi res.

-------
    A Simple, Enclosed,  Multispecies
System for the Evaluation of Infectivity,
 Toxicity, and Pathogenesis of MPCAs in
       Nontarget Aquatic Species
          Office of Pesticides
                Programs
                  ORD
                 USEPA
                  by


   SteveVs.  Foss,  and  John  A.  Couch

                 USEPA

    Environmental  Research Laboratory
          Gulf Breeze,  Florida

-------
1.     SCOPE.
1.1    The application of pathogenic microorganisms for the control  of
       pests has brought worldwide attention to the importance of these
       agents as microbial pesticides in their natural  insect hosts.
       With continued efforts of geneticists, microbiologists, and insect
       pathologists, improved and more effective microbial  pest control
       agents (MPCA's) will be available to potential  producers of commercial
       MPCAs in the future. (Margalit et al., 1985).  The possible intensive
       application of natural MPCAs and the introduction of genetically
       altered organisms into the environment presents a question of
       safety with regard to nontarget species.  Because of the present
       use and the probable increase in registration,  production and
       application of these agents in the future, the USEPA was given the
       responsibility for providing potential producers of MPCAs with
                         «»
       guidelines for tests to determine the safety of MPCAs in nontarget
       species. (Couch et al., 1985).
1.2    To provide these methods, we are concerned with the design, develop-
       ment, and laboratory testing of a simple, enclosed aquatic system
       that can maintain nontarget species from at least three different
       phyletic groups for a minimum of 30 days for agent safety tests.
       We consider this a system to initiate preliminary studies on the
       potential impact of MPCAs on nontarget species.  Our system does
       not attempt to simulate natural environments but rather to provide
       multispecies testing with limited interaction capability for
       evaluating endpoints of infectivity, pathogenicity and/or toxicity.
1.3    Other systems presented and discussed at this workshop will provide
       a larger opportunity for closer simulation of natural environments

-------
       and  for  studies  of  more  complex  interactions  among  microbial



       agents and  nontarget  species.



1.4    Preliminary studies indicate that  three  to  four  different  non-



       target species can  be successfully maintained in  the  same  system



       for  a 30 day period.   The  design of this test system  enables  us to



       expose simultaneously a  greater  number of animals to  MPCAs, and to



       provide  some species  interaction,  thus expediting evaluation  of



       the  risks of these  agents  in nontarget aquatic hosts.





2.     SELECTION OF NONTARGET SPECIES



2.1    Species  from three  representative  estuarine phyletic  groups were



       selected for testing:



       1.)  a  fish, Cyprinodon variegatus; 2.) a shrimp,  Palemonetes  pugio,



       and  3.)  two molluscs, Rangia cuneata and Crassostrea  virginica.



       These  animals were1 thosen  because  of their  availability,  laboratory



       adaptability, widespread estuarine and geographical distribution,



       and  ecological  role in the aquatic environment.  (Couch,  1983).



       All  4  of these species can be  readily found and  collected  in  most



       typical  estuaries along  the entire Atlantic and  Gulf  coasts of the



       United  States.   Inland laboratories wishing to use  these  estuarine



       species  as  test  animals, but unable to make collections  themselves,



       can  often obtain them from commercial sources.



2.1.1  The  fish, Cyprinodon  variegatus. inhabits shallow brackish areas



       of pools (small, sandy-bottomed  sites in bays, coves, bayous,



       creeks,  tidal cuts  or channels)  that are left isolated during low



       tides.   They are tolerant  of a wide range of  salinities  (0-142ppt)



       and  temperatures (2-39°C)  (Courtney & Couch,  1984).  Collection



       using either seine  net or  bait trap can  be  easily made during





                                   10

-------
       warmer months  throughout  the range,  and  anytime  during  the year  in

       warmer latitudes.   The  grass shrimp,  Palemonetes pugio,  can be

       found  in  beds  of  submerged vegetation in shallow estuarine waters

       (Williams,  1984).   They are normally  most  abundant  in a  salinity

       range  of  10-20ppt,  however this  grass shrimp  can be successfully

       maintained  in  lower or  higher salinity range  under  laboratory

       conditions.  During the warmer months they can easily be collected

       using  a push net  or fine  seine net.   The most favorable  habitat

       for the clam,  Rangia cuneata, is a combination of low salinity,

       high turbidity,  and a substrate  of sand, mud  and vegetation.  The

       common rangia is  usually  found in areas  where the salinity seldom

       exceeds 18ppt and can be  successfully maintained at lower or

       higher salinities.  (LaSalle et al.,  1985).  This clam can be

       collected by hand or with tongs  in shallow waters.   The  oyster,
                        * '
       Crassostrea virginica,  usually can be found growing on  a variety

       of substrates in  shallow  water,  halfway  between  high and low tide

       levels.  The range  of salinities favorable for £. virginica falls

       within two  zones, the polyhaline from 18-30ppt and  the  mesohaline,

       from 5-18ppt.  This oyster is tolerant of low salinities, but  its

       survival  is dependent on  the range of fluctuations  and  the  suddenness

       of the changes (Galtsoff, 1964).  Oysters can be collected  anytime

       of the year by hand or  by the use of tongs.

2.1.2  Animals we  tested were  collected from the estuarine system  located

       in the Pensacola/Gulf Breeze, Florida area.  Adult  C_.  variegatus

       and _P_. pugio were collected from Range Point, Santa Rosa Sound,  by

       seine  and push net; R_.  cuneata (2.5-4.5cm in size)  were collected

       by hand in  Escambia Bay from the shallow water  near the mouth  of
                                    11

-------
       the Escambia  River.   Substrate consisted  of a  sandy-clay  bottom
       intermittently  covered with  Thalassia  beds.  The  clams  were  found
       partially  or  completely  buried in  the  sediment.   Small  C_.  vjrqinica_
       (4-6cm in  size)  were  collected from  seawater troughs  at the  EPA
       Laboratory on Sabine  Island.

3.     TEST SYSTEM AND METHODS
3.1    Two 76 liter  glass  aquaria were filled to a 3  cm  depth  with  clean
       crushed coral shell over a recirculating  filtration  system.
       Seawater from Santa Rosa Sound (25 ppt salinity)  was  added to
       these tanks and diluted  to 15ppt with  deionized water.  Two  shrimp
       were placed in  each of 24 holding  cups.  Each  cup consisted  of a
       fine mesh  screen cylinder cemented to  a glass  Petri  dish  bottom.
       Twelve shrimp holding cups were placed in a suspended cup tray in
       each tank  with  20 "fish,  16 clams,  and  10  oysters, (See  fig.  1  )
       and were allowed to acclimate for  1  week.  Animals that died
       before the maintenance observation period (30  days)  began were
       replaced.
3.2    Two types  of  food,  a  commercial flake  or  live  artemia,  were  used
       for feeding.   In one  tank the shrimp were fed  one pressed flake-food
       pellet (approximately 0.056g/pellet) per  holding  cup.  Approximately
       0.5 g of unprocessed  flake food was  added to the  open tank space
       for the fish.  Shrimp in the second  tank  received approximately  10
       ml  of a suspension  of live artemia per holding cup and 300 ml  of
       live artemia  suspension  was  added  to the  fish  tank.   It was  noted  that
       a greater  amount of algae grew in  the  flake food  tank,  compared  to
       the live Artemia tank.   Animals were fed  3 times  a week for  30
       days.   Oysters  and  clams probably  filter-feed  upon bacteria, some
                                    12

-------
       algae and/or detritus available in the animals environment.
3.3    This test system can be adapted in several  ways.  To accommodate
       and maintain a greater or lesser number of animals, the size and
       shape of the test chamber can be varied.  Any desired salinity  can
       be maintained by either diluting existing seawater or by mixing
       commercially available sea salts with fresh water.  Temperatures
       can be easily controlled by using common aquarium heaters or coolers.

4.     PRELIMINARY EFFICACY OF SYSTEM AS MAINTAINED FOR 30 DAYS
4.1    The recirculating, static multispecies system maintained for 30
       days proved to be very successful.  Apparently, either method of
       feeding  (flake vs. Artemia) can be used when applicable.  The fish
       and clams had 100% survival with both feeding methods.  A 99%
       survival rate was noted for the oysters in both feeding systems.
       Eighty percent(80%«)'of the shrimp that were fed live artemia and
       84% of the shrimp fed flake food pellets survived.  The higher
       mortality for the shrimp, compared to the other species, is  within
       acceptable limits for this system. (Couch et al. 1983).  This
       mortality can be explained by the shrimps' direct contact with one
       another  in the holding cups, and their cannibalistic and antagon-
       istic tendencies.  A sampling of animals for each species group
       were examined grossly and appeared to be healthy.
            Interaction among species in the system included direct ingestion
       of oyster fecal strings by fish, filtering of fecal materials from
       fish by  oysters and clams, and exposure to fecal material from grass
       shrimp for all other species.  This provides desirable  interaction
       among test species because MPCA material may thus be exposed to
       potential natural degrading or enhancing factors.
                                    13

-------
5.     RECOMMENDATIONS  FOR  USE  OF  SYSTEM WITH  MPCA's



5.1    Two  methods  of exposing  animals to  MPCAs  using  this  system  are



       possible.  Dosing  thru  feeding appears  to be an efficient,  natural,



       and  certain  method for ensuring internal  exposure  to certain  MPCAs



       such as  viruses, bacteria,  and protozoans.  (Couch, 1983).   Fungi,



       such as  Lagenidium giganteum, which attach  externally to the



       cuticle  of their-hosts,  could be introduced directly as zoospores



       into the water in  test system in known  concentrations.



5.2    Tissues  from the exposed test animals can be examined, using



       specific histopathological,  ultrastructual, serological, and



       genetic  methods, to  evaluate possible effects associated with



       infectivity, pathogencity,  and toxicity.
                                   14

-------
                       Palemonetes pjjgig
                       (Grass Shrimp)
Cypjjnodon
      vaneggtus
(Sheepshead Minnow)
                                                               3,
                                                           Underground
                                                           Filter
                                                           System
fri6
Crassostrea yirginica
(Oyster)

-------
            TABLE  I   COMPONENTS  OF A  SIMPLE MULTISPECIES (3-4 SPECIES) LABORATORY TEST SYSTEM FOR MPCAs
                               (COMPARE COMPONENTS  IN THIS TABLE TO ITEMS IN FIGURE 1)
COMPONENTS
TEST TANK
AQUARIUM
FI6*
REF.
1
DESCRIPTION
ANY SIZE GLASS AQUARIUM
DEPENDING ON DESIRED SYSTEM
SOURCE
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FROM AQUARIUM
SUPPLY OR, CAN BE CONSTRUCTED
SEAWATER
CRUSHED CORAL
GRAVEL

RECIRCULATING UNDER-
GRAVEL FILTER SYSTEM
    0 - 33% SALINITY
COARSE GRAVEL SUBSTRATE COVERING
THE UNDERGRAVEL FILTER SYSTEM

TRAPS DIRT AND DEBRIS IN SUBSTRATE
ALSO CREATES A WATER-AIR MIXTURE
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE SEA SALTS OR
DILUTION OF SEAWATER

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FROM AQUARIUM
SUPPLY

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FROM AQUARIUM
SUPPLY
AIR SUPPLY
GLASS TRAY
SHRIMP HOLDING
CUPS

NONTARGET TEST
ANIMALS

FOOD
MPCAs TO BE
TESTED
CENTRAL AIR COMPRESSOR OR PORTABLE
ELECTRIC AIR PUMPS

A REMOVABLE GLASS TRAY WITH SHORT
SIDES SUSPENDED IN THE TEST AQUARIUM

FINE MESH SCREEN CYLINDER CEMENTED TO
GLASS PETRI DISH BOTTOMS

FISH, SHRIMP, CLAMS AND OYSTERS.
OTHERS MAY BE SUITABLE.

FISH FLAKE FOOD
BRINE SHRIMP (ARTEMIA)

(MICROORGANISMS) VIRUSES, BACTERIA,
PROTOZOA AND FUNGI
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FROM AQUARIUM
SUPPLY

CONSTRUCTED USING COMMERCIALLY
AVAILABLE MATERIALS

CONSTRUCTED USING COMMERCIALLY
AVAILABLE MATERIALS

COLLECTION FROM ESTUARIES OR OBTAINED
FROM COMMERCIAL SOURCES

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FROM AQUARIUM
SUPPLY
     *SEE FIGURE OF TESTSYSTEM FOR PICTORIAL DESCRIPTION OF COMPONENT

-------
                                References

     Couch,  J.A.,  S.S. Foss  and L.  Courtney,  1985.   Progress  Report on
Evaluation for Risks of an Insect Virus,  Bacterium,  and  Protozoon to a
Nontarget, Estuarine Crustacean.  Office  of Pesticides Program, ORD,
USEPA, 2 p.
     Couch,  J.A.,  S.M. Martin,  G. Tompkins, and  J. Kinney.  1983.  A Single
system for the Preliminary Evaluation of  Infectivity and Pathogenesis of
Insect Virus in a  Nontarget  Estuarine Shrimp.  Journal of Invert.
Pathology 43, 351-357.
     Courtney, L.A. and J. Couch, 1984.   Usefullness of  Cyprinodon variegatus
and Fundulus grandis in Carcinogenicity Testing:   Advantages  and Special
Problems. Natl. Cancer. Inst. Monogram 65:83-96.
     Galtsoff, P.S. 1964.  The American Oyster.   Fishery Bulletin, Vol  64.
United States Dept. of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service, Bureau  of
Commercial Fisheries,  pp 4-5, 405-406.
     LaSalle, M.W. and A.A.  de la Cruz. 1985  Species Profiles: Life
Histories and Environmental  Requirements  of Coastal  Fishes  and  Invertebrates
(Gulf of Mexico) Common Rangia. U.S. Fish Wild!.  Serv. Biol.  Rep 82
(11.31).  U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, TR  EL-82-4.  16 pp.
     Margalit, J.  and D. Dean.  1985.  The Story  of Bacillus thuringiensis
var. israelensis.  J. Am. Mosq.  Control Assoc. Vol  1, No  1 p5
     Williams, A.B. 1984.  Shrimps, Lobsters, and Crabs  of the  Atlantic
Coast of the Eastern United  States, Maine to Florida. Smithsonian
Institution Press,  pp 76-78.
                                    16

-------
A Microcosm System for Evaluating System-Level Infectivity  and
   Effects Of Microbial Pest Control Agents on Near-Shore,
                    Nnn-Tarnot f*r» minimi t.i P^
Non-Target Communities
                   For Office of Pesticides
                              By

                        Thomas W. Duke
             U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
              Office of Research and Development
              Environmental Research Laboratory
                       Gulf Breeze, FL
                              17

-------
INTRODUCTION
     Several commercial chemical companies are developing microbial  pest
control  agents for application to agricultural crops to control  specific
pests.  Under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act
(FIFRA), they are required to submit information on the potential  impact
of these, agents on the environment.  Since these agents cannot normally
be "field-tested" to determine their impact on non-target organisms,
laboratory tests can be extremely useful in evaluating potential impact.
     The near-shore marine area could receive these agents by direct
application for control of noxious insects or by transport of the agents
from adjoining freshwater and terrestrial environments.  A method is
needed to test sensitive near-shore organisms in a holistic manner without
an actual  release in the environment.  The procedure described herein
captures some of the interactive complexities that characterize the
structure and functions of the near-shore environment.
     This test procedure orginally was developed to evaluate the effects
of complex mixtures of chemicals on a rooted aquatic plant (seagrass)
community (Morton, et al., 1986).  Microbial pest control agents have
not yet been tested in the system.  Also, larger predators were excluded
from the microcosms and this could result in some difficulties when
extrapolating results to field situations.  Nevertheless, the proposed
microcosm test systems appears to be a reasonable tool for determining
the potential impact of these agents on the near-shore environment.
                                    18

-------
                         NEAR-SHORE  TEST  PROTOCOL

1.     SCOPE  and  PURPOSE
1.1    This test  is  designed  to  develop data  on  the  impact  of microbial  pest
       control  agents  (MPCA)  on  the  near-shore environment  using a  seagrass
       community  as  a  sensitive  test system.  Effects  of the MPCA on  the
       microcosms can  be  determined  through measurements of productivity;
       numbers, species  richness and biomass  of  macroinvertebrates; and
       degradation rates.

2.     MICROCOSM  and SUPPORT  FACILITIES
2.1    The microcosm is  designed to  simulate  desirable physical, chemical
       and biological  conditions existing in  the natural environment  where
       seagrass samples  are taken.   The support  facilities  (room, light
       fixtures,  air system)  ensure  proper environment for  testing.
       The experimental  microcosms provide a  community testing chamber that
       reflects conditions in the environment as much  as possible.
2.2    The microcosms  are plexiglass cylinders,  16.0 cm inside diameter,
       50 cm high that are attached  to a  plate on  the  bottom.  Cores
       collected from  the seagrass beds are slipped  intact  from the core
       cylinder into the test cylinder.
2.3    Samples of the  seagrass community  are  taken by  divers with plexiglass
       cylinders  14.0  cm inside diameter  and  50  cm high.  The cores
       penetrate 10 cm deep  in the grass  beds and  upon withdrawal,  contain
       sediment with attendent macroinvertebrates  and  grass.
2.4    In the laboratory, microcosms can  be operated with continuous  flow
       of seawater or  by replenishing the water  in the microcosms daily.
                                    19

-------
       (a)  Flowing  Water  System


           Unfiltered  seawater of  known  quality  is pumped into a settling


           reservoir above  the test  apparatus  (Figure 1  (modified from


           Morton  et al., 1986)).  A 1-mm  Nitex® filter  is fitted over


           the  delivery  standpipe  in the settling reservoir to exclude


           larger  material  from  reaching and clogging the delivery tubes


           to the  microcosms.  Seawater  is  flowed from the settling


           reservoir to  a baffled  20-liter Plexiglas® primary head-box


           suspended over the microcosms.   Twelve glass  standpipes, six


           at each end of the head-box,  are fitted with  silicone stoppers


           and  calibrated to deliver approximately 200 mL/min.  A larger


           diameter glass overflow standpipe at  each end of the primary


           head-box maintains the  water  at  a constant level.  From the


           twelve  standpipes, the  water  enters glass mixing tubes that
                         « *

           deliver the seawater  to twelve  secondary headboxes.  From


           each secondary head-box,  seawater is  delivered separately to


           four microcosms  at a  rate of  about  40 mL/min.  A glass cover


           is placed  over the open end of  the  microcosm  cylinder.


       (b)  Static  (Renewal) System


           In this system,  8 liters  of seawater  are placed  in the micro-


           cosms.   The water is  drained  (syphoned) from  each microcosm


           every 24 hours and  replaced by  fresh  seawater of known salinity,


           pH,  temperature  and dissolved oxygen.


2.5    Decomposition


       Leaf litter or  detritus bags  can  be added to each microcosm


       in order to determine impact  of the microbiological  pest


       control  agents  on decomposers.  (Weight loss of  bags in
                                    20

-------
UNFILTERED  OLj
SEAWATER

SETTLING
RESERVOIR
                                             PRIMARY HEAD BOX
                                               INJECTION OF
                                               MirRQBIAL PEST CONTROL AGENT
                                                         MIXING
                                                         TUBE
               MIXING
               RESERVOIRS
                   STIR
                   PLATES
SECONDARY
HEAD BOX
               PERISTALTIC
               PUMP
FIG. 1

-------
       treated  microcosm is compared with  that  in  control  -  weight
       loss  is  equated to degradation).  Bags  are  constructed  of 2 mm
       mesh  Nytex nylon netting and 10 cm  square.   Glass  rods  anchor
       the bags in the microcosms just above the sediment.
2.6    Lighting
       Lighting for the test is provided by four 400-WATT multivapor
       lamps and four high-intensity fluorescent bulbs  rated at 250 watts,
       Suspended 46.0 cm above the microcosms,  the bulbs  provided an
       average  light energy of 217 yE/m^/S.  Lights are connected to
       a 24  hour timer (12h light and 12h  dark).
2.7    A summary of components of the microcosms is found in Table 1.

3.     DECONTAMINATION
3.1    Tests must be conducted to determine the methods and  materials
       required to decontaminate microcosm glass tubing,  or  other
       materials that may contain the test organisms.   Appropriate
       disposal procedures must be employed if decontaminating agent
       is classified as a hazardous material.   Care must  be  taken to
       collect  and decontaminate flow-through or renewal  water.

4.     Definitive Test
4.1    The flow chart for conducting the test is found in Table 2.
       (Modification of Morton et al., 1986).  There should  be at least
       12 replicates of exposed microcosm  in each test.  The test is
       conducted for six weeks with flowing seawater and  for two weeks
       with  replenished water.
4.2    Harvest  and Treatment of Samples.
4.2.1  The 48-microcosm test system is harvested randomly at the end  of
                                    21

-------
       the test period.   Fifteen seagrass  leaves  with  associated epiphytes
       are taken from each  treatment  for analysis of biomass  and chlorophyll
       content.  Remaining  contents are sieved to separate plant and
       sediment portions  and placed into 0.5 mm nylon  bags.   All  portions
       should be immersed in propylene phenoxetol in seawater to relax
       organisms.  Plant  materials  are fixed in five percent  formalin
       until  the animaU  are picked from them and grass  weights determined.
       Sediment portions  are placed in ten percent formalin  in seawater
       with 100 mg/liter  rose bengal  stain.  Sediments are rinsed with
       freshwater, then  sieved through 1.0 and 0.5-mm  sieves.  Sieved
       material is stored in 60 percent 2-propanol until  the  macroinvertebrates
       can be sorted and  identified.   All  macrofauna are identified to
       the lowest taxonomic level possible.
4.2.2  Litter bags can be removed at  intervals for measurements of rates
                         .'
       of decomposition  or can be removed  at the  end of  the  test.  Bags
       are removed from  the microcosms, rinsed in freshwater, dried at
       100° C for 24 h,  weighed, and the weight change (loss) calculated.
4.2.3  Measurements of the Thalassia  leaf  samples includes chlorophyll a_
       per g tissue or per cm2 blade area.  Effects on epiphytic communities
       are observed by measuring differences in epiphytic biomass (ash
       free dry weight-AFDW) per cm2 of Thalassia leaf as a  biomass
       indicator, chlorophyll a_ per g AFDW epiphyte tissue as a community
       health indicator,  and chlorophyll a_ per cm2 leaf  area  as an
       indicator of photosynthetic  potential.  Details of these analyses
       to determine the  health and  productivity of the epiphytes can be
       found  in Price, et al. (19).
4.2.4  A summary of criteria for effects  is presented  in Table 3.
                                    22

-------
                Table 1.
                       Descriptive Table - Seagrass Microcosm
                Component

                Seagrass
                Macrobenthos
ro
CO
Description

Seagrass beds cored to a depth
of approximately 10.0 cm by
Plexiglas cylinder (14.0 cm in-
side diameter, 50.0 cm height)
grass, sediment and attendant
macroinvertebrates are sampled.

Taken as part of seagrass core.
Larger macroinvertebrates eli-
minated from microcosms.
                Leaf Litter    Bags of 2 mm nylon netting,
                Detritus Bags  10 cm square.  Either dried
                               or fresh seagrass are added to
                               bags that are anchored in the
                               microcosm by glass rods.
Source

Within euphotic zone of
near-shore environment,
particularly temperate
sub-tropic, and tropical
waters.
Taken in same location
as grasses.
                                    Leaves for bags taken from
                                    same grass beds as sea-
                                    grass cores.
Species

Thalassia testudinum used in
this protocol, however, other
grasses such as Zostera marina
may be employed.
The kinds and numbers of species
vary with season and water
quality at time of sampling.
Examples of macroinvertebrates
collected in the fall in Santa
Rosa Sound, FL, are as follows:
Annelida
 Aricidae philbinae
 Armandia macu!ata~
 Fabriciola spp.
 Mediomastus californiensi s
 Nereis pelagica
 Pista sp. A
 Prionospio heterobranchia
 Tharyx marioni
ArthropoHa
 Elasmopus laevi s
Mollusca
 Bittium varium

The leaves in the bags should be
the same as those used in the
microcosms.

-------
Table 1.  (Cont'd)

Component      Description
                                    Source
                             Species
Microcosms
Lights
Consist of Plexiglas cylinders
slightly  larger than coring
apparatus (16 cm inside dia-
meter; 50 cm high).  Seagrass
cores slipped inside microcosm
so each one contained intact
core of seagrass and attendent
sediment, macroinvertebrates,
and epiphytes.  Experimental
apparatus shown in Figure 1.

A combination of 4 400-watt
multi vapor lamps (Model Mur
400 U) and 8 215-W cool-white
fluorescent lamps (Model E96
T12/CW/1511).  Lights are
connected to 24 hour timer
(12h light and 12h dark).  An
average of 217 jjE/cm^/S were
delivered to the surface of
the microcosms.
Plexiglas tubes can be pur-
chased at most local  plastic
pipe supply companies or
plumbing supply companies.
Electrical Supply Co.

-------
Table 2.
                                FLOW CHART
                         Collect Cores From Field
                    Establish Microcosm in Laboratory
Begin Daily
Measurements
of pH, Tem-
perature,
Salinity
Acclimate to Laboratory Conditions
                        Add Microbial Test Agents

                          Expose for Six Weeks
                          (Daily Water Renewal)
                                   or
                          Expose for Two Weeks
                              (Static Test)
                           Harvest Microcosms


                                 Analyze


                           Macroinvertebrates:
                            Number
                            Kinds
                            Species Diversity
                            Patterns of recognition

                           Rate of Decomposition (Weight Loss of
                                                  Litter Bags)

                           Chlorophyll Content and Growth of Seagrass

                           Kinds and Density of selected Microbes
                                    25

-------
Table 3.
                Criteria for Effects - Seagrass Microcosm
Component           Criteria

Seagrass            Chlorophyll a_ per gram
                    blade area
                    Growth rate
Macroinvertebrates  Number of individuals
                    per species

                    Species richness

                    Total  number of
                    individuals

                    Species diversity

                    Cluster or discrimi-
                    nate "(analysis or
                    other  methods of
                    pattern recognition
Microbes
Enumeration of desired
functional  groups
(Nitrification, Sulfur,
etc.)
                          Method

                          Acetone extraction
                          Spectrophotometer
                          analysis

                          Movement of alumi-
                          num tape during
                          experiment

                          Microcosms are
                          harvested at the
                          end of desired
                          time.  Macroinver-
                          tebrates are seived,
                          (1.0 and 0.5 mm),
                          identified and
                          enumerated.  10
                          numerically dominant
                          species can be
                          analyzed.
Plate counts
                     Reference

                     Strickland and
                     Parsons (1972)
                     Modification of
                     Zieman (1974)
                     Morton et al.
                     (1986)
                                         26

-------
                                     References





     Morton, D.R., Duke, T.W. Macauley, J.M., Clark,  J.R.,  Price  W.A.,



Hendricks, S.J., Owsley-Montgomery, S.L., and Plaia,  G.R.   In  Press.



"Impact of Drilling Fluids on Seagrasses:  An Experimental  Community



Approach."  Proceedings of a Symposium entitled "Community  Toxicity



Testing."  1986. 25 pp.



     Price, W.A., Macauley, J.M., and Clark, J.R.  In Press



"Effects of Drilling Fluids on Thalassia testudinum and Its Epiphytic



Algae."  1986, 21 pp.



     Strickland, J.D.H. and Parsons T.R.  (1972).  A Practical  Handbook  of



Seawater Analysis.  Bulletin 167 (2nd ed).  Fish. Res. Bd.  Can. 310 p.



     Zieman, J.C.  (1974).  Methods for the study of the growth and



production of turtle grass, Thalassia testudinum Konig. Aquaculture



4, 139-143.
                                     27

-------
EXPERIMENTAL MARINE MICROCOSM TEST PROTOCOL
                    AND
              SUPPORT DOCUMENT
Measurement of the Ecological  Effects, Fate
 and Transport of Living Microorganisms in
    in a Site-Specific Marine Ecosystem
                    by


               Kenneth Perez
         Ecosystems Analysis Branch
         Environmental Research Lab
                   E.P.A.
             Narragansett,  R.I.
                     28

-------
                             TABLE OF  CONTENTS



                                                                 Page

(A)   PREFACE                                                        31


(B)   TEST PROTOCOL

          1.   Scope ancLPurpose                                    34

          2.   Definition of Natural System                         34

          3.   Test Organism                                        36

          4.   Microcosm Facility                                   37

          5.   Test Procedures

                    5.1  Test Purpose                               43
                    5.2  Assumptions                               43
                    5.3  Test of Assumptions                       44
                    5.4  Use of Test Results                       44
                    5.5  Preliminary Testing                       44
                    5.6  -definitive Test                           45
                    5.7  Waste Di sposal                             55

          6.   Data Analysis                                        55

          7.   Test Protocol Bibliography                           58

          8.   List of Figures                                      59


(C)   SUPPORT  DOCUMENT

          Purpose of the Support Document                          60

          Rationale for the Use of Microcosms                      60

          Rationale for Microcosm Design                           61

          Rationale for Test Procedures                             62

             Test Water Collection and Distribution                62

             Test Organism Addition                                62
                                     29

-------
                                                        Page

   Sampling                                               63

     Ecological Effects                                   63
     Ecological Fate                                      63

Data Analysis                                             64

Restrictions of Test Protocol                              64

Support Document Bibliography                              65
                        30

-------
                                 PREFACE

     Commercial  chemical  companies are required, under the Federal
Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) to submit information
about the agricultural use of indigenous and genetically engineered
organisms.  This information is used by the Environmental  Protection
Agency to develop an environmental and/or risk assessment  for each  test
organism prior to the approval of a production permit.  This assessment,
in the marine environment, would include effects of the organism on the
receiving body or ecosystem and the potential for indirect human exposures
through the consumption of marine organisms.

     The microcosm test protocol described herein possesses many of the
physiochemical and biological complexities of natural coastal marine
systems.  This was achieved by coupling natural and undisturbed assemblages
of the water column and benthic communities in a realistic manner.   This
test system, therefore, will provide a diversity of microenvironments in
which the fate and effects of the introduced test organism can be measured.
If the test organism survives and proliferates in the microcosm, this
protocol has the potential to estimate the specific impacts at the ecosystem
level of organization.  It may also provide estimates of the air and
advective transport of the test organism to adjacent areas.  Such information
enables the user to develop a more accurate environmental  risk assessment
of the test organism as compared to those assessments founded upon test
systems possesing lower levels of physical and biotic complexities.  In
addition, the recommended experimental procedure has some internal  checks
designed to establish the validity of the test results.  Furthermore, the
knowledge and control of inputs and outputs of variables,  perturbations
                                    31

-------
and processes minimize the variance between replicate microcosms.  This
dramatically enhances the ability to detect differences between the
exposed and control sets of microcosms utilizing standard statistical
procedures.

ASSUMPTIONS AND CONSTRAINTS
     The protocol described below is a modification of one designed to
establish the fate and effects of toxic chemicals (Perez, 1983).  Because
of the limited information regarding such test procedures using living
microorganisms, these modifications were made, primarily, on a conceptual
basis.  As a result, there are a number of assumptions and constraints
associated with the use of this protocol.
     First, we believe that number of replicates per treatment condition
and the error rate found to be adequate for toxic chemicals testing, will
also be adequate for detecting differences between control and exposed
treatments when used for microorganism testing.
     Second, we assume that the ecological effects and fate of the test
organism in the laboratory microcosms will be sufficiently similar to
that realized in a field system when exposed to the test organism.
However, until field validation studies are performed, environmental risk
assessments, based on data derived from this protocol, will be constrained
by this assumption.
     The last constraint is that natural sunlight is not simulated in
this protocol.  If the test organism (1) accumulates in the surface
microlayer (i.e., the interface between the water and the overlying gas
phase)  and (2) is sensitive to ultraviolet radiation, this protocol will
potentially overestimate the survivability and proliferation of the test
organism in the marine environment and thus provide a worst case scenario.
                                    32

-------
     Finally, some words of caution in the application of this test
protocol are necessary.  The data and ensuing assessments derived from
this procedure are constrained in two primary areas.  (1) Because of
the size of the microcosm tank, macrofauna such as fishes and large
crustaceans have been excluded.  As a result, some economically important
species cannot be tested in these systems.  In addition, macrofauna
exclusion could possibly affect the responses of some of the measured
ecological effects.  Whether macrofauna significantly influence such
variables (phytoplankton, zooplankton, nutrients, chemical distribution,
etc.) for different ecological systems, particularly within the experi-
mental time frame of 30 days,  remains to be established.  (2) The micro-
cosm test system was developed from a temperate Northeast (U.S.) estuarine
ecosystem where intertidal  and reef (e.g., oyster, coral, etc.) subsytems
are either small in area or missing.  The applicability of this protocol
to other site-specific marine  ecosystems where either shallow conditions
and/or major reef subsystems exist has yet to be determined.

CONTAINMENT
     This protocol is written  and the system designed to minimize environ-
mental release and human exposure to any Genetically Engineered Material
(GEM).  The level of containment designed, in our view, exceeds, or at
least equals, the National  Institutes of Health, Class  III biological
safety level (Anon. ,1984).  If the test organism is an  indigenous micro-
organism, that is, one naturally found in field environments, containment
conditions can be relaxed to the degree that the primary concern will be
to prevent the contamination of the experimental control tanks.
                                     33

-------
                              TEST PROTOCOL

1.      SCOPE AND PURPOSE
1.1    The standards  of this  subsection  are  designed  to  develop data
       on  the fate and ecological  effects  of living microorganisms  on
       marine ecosystems.   The United States Environmental  Protection
       Agency (EPA) will  use  these data  to assess  the hazards these
       organisms may  present  to the marine environment and  potentially,
       human health,  through  uptake and  accumulation  in  human food  species.

2.      DEFINITION OF  A NATURAL SYSTEM
2.1    The natural marine system (designated as  "natural  system")  at a
       particular geographic  location consists  of  a  coupled water  column
       and benthic subsystem. Within both  the water  column  and benthic
       subsystems, certain.physical and  chemical conditions, and
       biological properties  exist. These  conditions  and properties are
       simulated in laboratory microcosms  as described in Section  4.2
       and 5.6.2.
2.1.1  The physical and chemical conditions  of  the natural  system  are
       defined in terms of its:
       (1)  Boundaries -  The  boundaries  of the  natural system are
       delineated by  the  maximum excursion of water  above and below a
       selected point during  one complete  tidal  cycle.
       (2)  Light - The light regime of  the  natural  system is
       characterized  by the photoperiod, the best  estimate of average
       monthly incident radiation (total incident  radiation per day
       divided by photoperiod), the average  seasonal  water extinction
       coefficient, the average daytime  vertical  light intensity for the
                                    34

-------
       entire water  column,  and  the  depth  at which  the average  light
       intensity occurs.
       (3)   Sea water  - That fluid  existing within  the boundaries of the
       natural system.
       (4)   Sea water  turbulence -  The  average  water motion  realized for
       the  entire  water column  of the natural system during  the period
       of experimentation.
       (5)   Sea water  turnover  rate - The  time  required  for  one complete
       water turnover  or  exchange within the defined boundaries of the
       natural system.
       (6)   Ratio  of benthic surface area  to sea  water volume - The
       ratio obtained  by  dividing the calculated  benthic  surface area of
       the natural system by the best estimate  of water  volume  of the
       system.
       (7)   Sediment - The bottom substrate  existing, at  the mean water
       depth, within the  boundaries of  the natural  system.
       (8)   Sea water  flow rate over sediment  surfaces -  The average
       tidal velocity  over the  bottom as measured in the  natural system.
2.2    Biological  Conditions and Descriptions
2.2.1  The biota  of  the natural  system  is  characterized  by  the  organisms
       in the water  column and  benthic  subsystem.
       (1)   The water  column is characterized  by  the numbers and species
       composition of  phytoplankton, zooplankton, and transient larval
       forms found in  the sea water at  the designated collection site  at
       a mid-tide.  The water column, with its  assemblages  of  biota,  is
       obtained from the  natural system by the  methods described for
       filling the microcosms (Section  5.6.2(1)).
                                    35

-------
       (2)   The  benthic  subsystem  is characterized  by  the  sediment type
       and the structural composition of the  benthic community,  i.e.,
       numbers,  species  composition, and feeding  types of  organisms
       collected from  the benthic  boxes  (Section  4.2.1 (2,3))  and re-
       tained on a  0.5 mm screen.
       (3)   If the  natural  system  has more than one distinct benthic
       community, then those  having direct routes to human consumption
       or which  are of significant economic and aesthetic  importance
       should be considered for  experimental  use.

3.     TEST  ORGANISM
3.1    Information  Required
3.1.1  A detailed description of the test organism  including levels
       at which  human  health  may be affected, and any  known methods for
       identifying  and measuring the organism must  be  supplied.   All
       known information regarding the  decontamination of  air, water,
       and surfaces contaminated with  the test organism should be
       included.
3.1.2  The degree of purity and  the  identification  and quantification
       of any contaminating organisms,  if known,  should be determined.
3.1.3  It is extremely important to  have a knowledge  of, or a best
       estimate  of  the test organism's  mode and  form  of entry into  the
       marine environment.   Specifically, does the  test organism enter
       by atmospheric  or aqueous sources?   Is the test organism  in
       association  with  other materials such  as  a dispersing agent?
       As will  be discussed in Section  5.5.1, the extent of such
       information  will  determine the  method  by  which  the test organism
       is added  to  the experimental microcosms.
                                   36

-------
3.2    Methods must be described for collecting and measuring the test



       organism in and/or on the air, sea water, surface microlayer,



       sediment, biota (both whole animal and specific tissues if



       necessary), and microcosm surfaces.





4.     MICROCOSM FACILITY



4.1    The microcosm facility (Figure 1)  is designed to simulate



       relevant physical, chemical, and biological  conditions existing



       in the natural system described in Section 2.  It is composed  of



       two basic parts: (1) the support equipment (room, waterbath,



       light and turbulence fixtures, test compartments, and an air



       evacuation system) and (2) the experimental  microcosms (tanks,



       paddles, benthic cylinders, pumps and pump air supply).  Two



       physically separate units (one each for exposed and control



       microcosms) must be'used when biological substances are being  tested.



4.1.1  Support Equipment (See Figure 1)



       (1) All testing must be performed in a room that eliminates any



       light source other than that provided by the microcosm facility.



       (2)  The microcosm tanks must be held in a waterbath of sufficient



       dimensions, with sufficient heating/cooling capacities, as to



       provide uniform test temperatures within all treatment conditions



       and maintain those temperatures within 1  C of the natural system



       at the time of the experiment.



       (3)  A canopy above the waterbath should hold sufficient fluorescent



       lighting to provide an even light distribution at the desired  light



       intensity over all the experimental microcosms.  Light is provided



       by "Cool White" fluorescent bulbs, and the photoperiod controlled



       by a 24 hour timer.  A plexiglass cover, the same length and width





                                    37

-------
of the canopy, is mounted directly  below the fluorescent lamps.
(4)   The open area between the canopy  and waterbath is enclosed
and sealed with plexiglass.  The front plexiglass covers are re-
movable to facilitate setting up and filling the microcosm tanks.
These covers are equipped with rubber  gloves and air locks (Figure
6) to facilitate the safe collection and removal of samples.  The
air locks will be designed to allow the application of an appro-
priate decontamination agent (5.5.5) to the exterior of sampling
vials, pipets, etc. prior to removal from the chamber.  The air
locks are vented to the air exhaust system (Section 411.1[6]).
Plexiglass panels are also mounted  transversly within the waterbath/
canopy module.  These panels are joined and sealed to the horizontal
plexiglass sheet mounted below the  fluorescent lights and extend
approximately ten cm. below the water  surface, to provide airtight
test compartments (Figure 6).  The  first three compartments will
each hold two microcosm tanks.  The fourth compartment will hold
three tanks.  All nine tanks within a  given waterbath/canopy unit
(Figure 1) will be reserved for one specific treatment condition
(i.e., exposed or control  (Section  5.6.1 (1)).  The individual test
units (exposed and control) must be physically separated from each
other to reduce the chance of contamination of the control tanks.
Access to the microcosm tanks during a test is via the rubber gloves
and air locks mounted in the front  of each test unit.
(5)  Turbulence is provided by a system that consists of an electric
motor, motor controller, chain drive,  mounts and drive shafts.
The motor should have the capability of maintaining speeds of 1  to
40 RPM.  This system is mounted on  the canopy with the drive shafts
                             38

-------
       extending  through,  directly  above  each  microcosm  tank  (Figure 1).
       The  paddles  are bolted  to the  drive  shafts.
       (6)   A slightly negative air pressure  is  maintained  within each
       test compartment.  An  exhaust fan draws  air  from the  test compart-
       ments through a PVC pipe manifold. The  exhaust air is  passed
       through HEPA particle filters  capable  of  removing the  test organism
       (Figure 1).   The^filtered air  is vented through a stack outside of
       the  laboratory building.  The  exhast stack  should be as far removed
       as possible  from the laboratory air  intake.
4.2    Experimental Microcosms
4.2.1  The  experimental microcosms  are designed  to provide  a  multi-trophic
       level experimental  chamber that has  coupled  pelagic  (water column)
       and  benthic  communities similar to those  existing in the natural
       system.
       (1)   The microcosm tanks are 140 liter, cylindrical  fiberglass
       containers (Figure 3).   The  tanks  are  held  in position by a plywood
       "collar" mounted in the water bath trough and encircling each tank
       approximately 15 cm below the  rim.
       (2)   The benthic boxes  are thick walled PVC cylinders, open at  both
       ends, and  are approximately  30 cm  long  (Figure  5).   The inner
       diameter of  the benthic cylinder must  be such that the microcosms
       sediment surface area-to-water volume  ratio equals that of the
       natural system (Section 2.1.1(6)).
       (3)   The benthic cylinders are used  by divers to  collect undisturbed
       sediment cores from the prescribed portion  of the natural  system
       2.1.1 (7)  and 2.2.1 (3).  The  depths of the core  should be equal
       to or greater than the  depth of biological  habitation  or activity
                                    39

-------
but not exceed 25 cm.   The bottoms  of the cylinders (cores)  are



sealed, prior to installation in  the  microcosm tanks,  with PVC



plugs secured by PVC bolts (Figure  5).  The cores, at  this point,



should be watertight i.e., the water  overlying the sediment  core



will not flow downward between the  sediment periphery  and the



cylinder.  If shells and/or other debris, biologically derived



tunnels, etc. preclude this condition, then such cores should be



rejected. The length of time between  collection of the cores and



initiation of the test should not exceed two weeks.  During the



interim period the cores can be held  in the laboratory, submerged



in  flowing, well aerated sea water.



(4)  Waterflow over the sediment  core in the microcosm is provided



by  an air displacement pump (Figures  3,4,5). The dimensions of the



pump should be sufficient to provide  a flow comparable to the



average bottom water flow rate of the natural system.   The pump



is  positioned in the tank adjacent  to the benthic core (Figures 1,



3). The benthic core is mounted in  the microcosm tank  so that the



cylinder overflow port is approximately 1 cm. above the tank water



level. The cylinder and pump are  supported from fiberglass angle



brackets bolted to the inside of  the  tank (Figures 3,5).  Water



from the microcosm tank enters the  pump through a small (2 cm)



hole in bottom.  When air pressure  is applied to the pump, a



silicon rubber check valve inside the pump is forced downward and



seals the bottom hole.  This forces water in the pump  through a



connecting tube and into the benthic  cylinder.  Water entering the



cylinder is directed into several horizontal streams by a diffuser



(Figure 5)  in order to minimize sediment disturbance and re-
                             40

-------
suspension.  Air pressure to the pumps is controlled by an
electronic timer operating a solenoid valve.  The air continues
to force water out of the pump for a preselected period of time.
The pumping time must be less than that required to force all  the
water out of the pump.  The timer then activates the solenoid
valve which stops the air flow, allowing water to re-enter the
pump from the microcosm tank.  Again, after a pre-defined refill
period (at least long enough to allow the pump to completely
refill), the air resumes flowing and the cycle is repeated.  Water
overflows from the benthic cylinder back into the microcosm tank
through a small hole located approximately 5 cm. above the sediment
level.  The rate of waterflow should approximate the mean tidal
velocity measured at the sediment surface of the natural system
(Section 2.1.1(8))
(5)  The light intensity over the sediment surface should approxi-
mate that incident in the bottom meter of the natural system. This
is accomplished by placing a light filter or cover over the top
and sides of the benthic cylinder.  See Section 5.5.4 for establish-
ment of water column light intensity.
(6)  Turbulence is generated by paddles that are connected to the
drive shafts described in Section 4.1.1(5) and Figures  (1,2).  The
paddle consists of a vertical shaft with two rows of smaller
diameter shafts fused to it radiating horizontally outward (Figure
2). The length and number of arms are dependent on the microcosm
tank, benthic cylinder and pump configurations, and the level of
turbulence desired.  The turbulence level in the microcosms is
controlled by paddle configuration as well as the speed of rotation,
                             41

-------
Once the paddle configuration is  established,  the speed of rotation
is adjusted so that  the dissolution  rate (described  as  weight
loss/time)  of pure gypsum (CaS04)  blocks (1.5cm x 2.5 cm x 1.0
cm), distributed throughout a microcosm tank,  is statistically
equivalent  to the dissolution rates  of gypsum  blocks measured  in
the water column (top  to bottom)  of  the natural  system  during the
season of the experiment.  Dissolution rates should  be  measured and
water turbulence adjusted prior to each experiment.
(7)  Several  small fiberglass disks, approximately 1 cm2, are  sus-
pended below the water surface.  These disks should  be  constructed
from the same material as the tank.   They will be used  to provide
estimates of the amount of test organism adhering to the test
tank.
(8)  The tank is covered with a plexiglass cover.  The  cover serves
to prevent  the release of the test organism to the laboratory
atmosphere  and allows  for the monitoring of the atmosphere above
the water surface for  aerosolization of the test organism.  The
cover is made of 0.25  inch thick  plexiglass and is mounted, with
an air tight seal, to  the tank (Figure 3).  The cover has a 1.5
inch hole in the center over which is mounted a ball bearing
pillow block (flanged  unit).  A fiberglass rod, approximately 18
inches long, is inserted in the pillow block.   The pillow block
unit is seated on a silicon gasket and makes an air tight seal
with the plexiglass cover.  The fiberglass rod is attached, with
couplings,  to the paddle (lower end) and the drive shaft (upper
end).  Another hole is drilled near  the edge of the cover and
fitted with an air line coupler for  the benthic pump (Figure 7).
                             42

-------
       Air  line  fittings  (Figure 7)  are  also  provided  to  allow  air to  be
       drawn  across  the water  surface.   The  rate  of  air flow  must be
       sufficient  to maintain  the concentrations  dissolved  gases eqivalent
       to field  levels.   Other openings  can  be  made  in the  cover to
       accommodate additional  sampling  if  necessary.   Any openings in
       this cover  must  be equiped with  plugs  or covers which  allow them
       to be  sealed.
       (9)  All  test equipment and sampling  devices  that  come in contact
       with the  sea water and  test organisms  must have been decontaminated
       by appropriate means (5.5.5), washed  with  detergent  and  thoroughly
       rinsed with deionized water prior to  use.

5.     TEST PROCEDURES
5.1    Test Purpose
5.1.1  The  purpose of the-experimental  ecosystem  (microcosm)  test  is  to
       determine the fates and ecological  effects of introduced micro-
       organisms within a site specific marine  or estuarine ecosystem
       within a  30 to 60  day period.
5.2    Assumptions
5.2.1  The  ability to extrapolate the results derived from  the  experi-
       mental microcosms  to the natural  system  is based  on  the  correspon-
       dence  of  the biological events expressed in the experimental
       control tanks and  those realized in the  natural  system at  the  time
       of the experiment.  For those biological events that are statist-
       ically equivalent  (a = 0.05), it is assumed that  the results
       observed  in the experimental  tanks receiving the  test  organism
       would  also  be realized in the natural  system, if  similarly  stressed,
5.2.2  It  is  assumed that the arbitrarily chosen  mode and form of  entry
                                    43

-------
       of the test organisms  into the microcosms  will  simulate the known
       or predicted entry  into  the natural  system.
5.3    Test of Assumption  5.2.1
5.3.1  The fate and ecological  effects of the test  organism can be
       ascertained in the  experimental  microcosms and  related to the
       expected perturbation  behavior in a natural  system provided the
       levels of all  relevant independent variables,  either simulated
       and/or realized in  the microcosms, are equal  to those in the
       natural system at the  time of the test.
5.4    Use of Test Results
5.4.1  The data generated  from these microcosms will  be used to better
       understand the potential fate, transport and  ecological effects
       of the test organism in marine ecosystems.  The assessment should
       discuss the potential  ecological effects and  the possibility of
       indirect human exposures associated with the  mode and form of
       release of the test organism in a specific marine ecosystem.
5.5    Preliminary Testing
5.5.1  Input of Test Organism:   Mode, form and exposure levels.  The
       manufacturers recommended mode (i.e., atmospheric, aqueous) and
       form (i.e., liquid, solid, with or without carrier) of application
       of the test organism into the natural environment will be simulated
       in the experimental microcosms.
5.5.2  Input of Test Organism:   Desired exposure concentration.  The
       nominal exposure concentration of the test organism within the
       microcosms should be at the manufacturers recommended application
       level.
                                    44

-------
5.5.3  Sampling and measurement.  Procedures and techniques  must be
       obtained or developed for sampling and measuring the  test
       organism in sea water, air, surface microlayer,  sediment,
       tissues, and microcosm surfaces prior to the definitive test.
5.5.4  Light Intensity.  Preliminary tests should be performed (without
       the test organism) to establish the proper light intensity over
       the microcosms. -These tests should be done with all  the microcosm
       equipment and facilities (i.e., waterbath, tank, paddle, benthic
       box and pump) in place.  The tests should be performed at several
       light levels, based upon conditions listed in Section 2.1.1 (2),
       with photoperiod equal to ambient conditions, for at  least 14
       days.  Those light levels producing phytoplankton abundances that
       are statistically equivalent to the natural system should be used
       in the definitive test.
5.5.5  Decontamination:  Tests must be performed to determine the methods
       and materials required to decontaminate microcosm test compartments,
       air locks, and sample containers that may contain the test organism.
       Appropriate disposal  procedures must be employed if the decontaminat-
       ing agent is classified as, or the investigator feels is, a hazardous
       material.
5.6    Definitive Test
5.6.1  The definitive test consists basically of (a) the initial setup and
       filling, (b) addition of the test organism, (c) daily sampling and
       water exchange, and (d) final sample collections.
       (1)   Experimental design:  There should be at least  nine replicate
       control and nine replicate exposed microcosms established for  each
       experiment.
                                    45

-------
5.6.2  The microcosm  test  system is  placed  in  operation  as  follows:
       (1)  The  test  water is  collected  from the  natural  system at
       mid-tide  by hand  bucketing or non-destructive  pumping,  (diaphragm
       pump) and transported to  the  test  facility.   If the  natural
       system is vertically stratified  in terms of  temperature and/or
       salinity, the  initial filling water  should be  a mixture (average)
       of water  collected  from various  depths.  Subsequent  collections
       for water exchange  (Section 5.6.4(4)) and  biological  sampling
       (Section  5.6.6) are performed in  the same  manner.
       (2) During the filling  process,  the  water  is distributed equally
       among the microcosm tanks until  the  prescribed volume is reached.
       (3) The benthic cylinders containing the sediment  cores (Section
       4.2.1(2,3)) are carefully placed  in  the tanks  (Section  4.2.1(4))
       so as to  minimize-sediment disturbance.
       (4) The benthic pumps are placed  adjacent  and  connected to the
       benthic cores  (Figure 3).  The plexiglass  covers,  with  paddles,
       water sampling and  exchange tubes  attached (Figure 3),  are placed
       on the tank.  A short flexible tube  is  used  to connect  the benthic
       pump to the air line fitting  on  the  under  side of each  cover.  The
       covers are then bolted  or otherwise  clamped  to the tank rims to
       provide an air tight seal.  Air  lines  (Figure  3)  supplying low
       pressure  air to the benthic pumps  are attached to the air line
       fitting on the top  of the covers.
       (5)  The  paddles  are connected to  the drive  shafts.   The speed
       of rotation is established (see  Section 4.2.1(6))  to generate a
       turbulence level  equivalent to that  in  the natural system.
       (6)  Light intensity at the microcosm tank water  surface is

                                    46

-------
       controlled  by adjusting the shading  of  fluorescent  lights  with
       aluminum foil  or similar material  to achieve  levels  as  determined
       in Section  5.5.4.  Photoperiod is  set equal to  ambient  conditions.
       (7)   Temperature in the water bath is adjusted  to the average daily
       temperature of the natural  system  being simulated.
       (8)   After  any disturbed sediment  in the benthic cylinders  settles,
       the low pressure,air to the benthic  pumps is  turned  on  and  water
       flow to the benthic cylinders begun  at  an average rate  equal to
       the average tidal flow over the benthic substrate in the  natural
       system. (Sect. 4.2.1(4)).
5.6.3  Addition of the test organism
       (1)   The test organism is added to the water  column  of  the experi-
       mental  microcosms in the mode, form, and concentration  established
       in Section  5.5.1 and 5.5.2.
       (2)   If a carrier other than water is used to disperse  the test
       organism in the natural system (Section 5.5.1), it  should  also
       be used to  apply it in the test system.  Analysis of effects will
       be based on the integrated effects of both the  test  organism and
       carrier.
       (3)   If input of the test organism to the natural system  is other
       than a  one  dose application (i.e., multiple application,  runoff),
       the test organism must be added to the microcosm tanks  in the
       same manner as the initial  dose whenever there is a water exchange
       (Section 5.6.4(3,4)) but only in quantities sufficient  to achieve
       the desired test concentrations in the replacement  water.
5.6.4  Performance of the test
       (1)   The experiment is run for 30  days.  It is recommended that  this
                                     47

-------
test be conducted during the temperature extremes of an annual
cycle.  Two tanks (both from the same compartment) from each
treatment condition must be sacrificed and comprehensively sampled
(at days 10, 20, and 30) in order to determine the fate dynamics
of the test organism.  If, after thirty days, the test organism in
the water column has not reached steady state, the operation of
the remaining si* tanks (three each of control and exposed) will
be continued for an additional thirty days.
(2)  Water turnover volume and frequency is established to match
the exchange rate of the natural system (Section 2.1.1(5)). Water
exchange in the microcosm tanks should be scheduled at least
three times a week and should coincide with the biological and
chemical sample collections.  The discreet volume of water
removed during the water exchange equals the calculated amount
minus that volume removed during biological and chemical sampling.
(3)  Water removal from the microcosm tanks for water exchange,
biological, and chemical sampling is accomplished by drawing the
desired volume of tank water into the waste water vacuum flask.
Each flask is equiped with a float switch (Figure 6) which will
turn off the vacuum pump should the water volume in the flask
exceed the desired volume.  Samples of this water can then be
taken for zooplankton enumeration.  The remaining water can be
drained into the waste water tank (Figure 1).  The waste water
tank will have had a sufficient volume of the disinfectant added
(5.5.5) to kill the test organisms present in the waste water.
This process is repeated for each experimental tank.  The waste
water must be tested to insure that the test organism is not
                             48

-------
       present  before being  disposed.
       (4)   On  water exchange days,  the refill  water  tank  is  filled with
       newly collected water (5.6.2  [1]).   Phytoplankton and  zooplankton
       samples  are collected from the  refill  water for  comparison with
       those taken from the  control  and exposed microcosm  tanks.  The
       refill  tank is placed in the  refill  chamber and  the chamber sealed.
       The  water and vacuum  lines are  connected via the gloved  ports.
       Water replacement is  accomplished by first drawing  the desired
       volume of newly bucketed water  from the  refill water tank  into the
       refill  water vacuum flask.  This water is then allowed to  drain
       into its respective experimental tank.  After  all the  tanks have
       been refilled, the refill water tank is  disconnected (via  the
       gloved ports) from the refill  line  and the chamber  and refill tank
       disinfected as a precaution in  case of accidental or inadvertent
       contamination.  The refill tank can then be removed, washed and
       readied for the next  use.
       (5)   Open Petri dishes containing an appropriate growth  medium
       can  be placed at various locations  within the  test, replacement
       water, and waste water chambers during the test  period.   Any
       indication of the test organism growing  in the dishes  would be
       positive proof of contamination within the chamber.  Negative
       results (i.e., no growth), however, would not  necessarily  be  proof
       of no contamination.
5.6.5  Test Organism Fate Sampling
       (1)   Samples of the test organism in the air and water column
       should be taken on water exchange days prior to  the actual
       replenishment.  Samples from the surface microlayer, sediments,
                                    49

-------
benthic organisms and microcosm surfaces will be taken from those
tanks sacrificed at day 10, 20, and 30 (5.6.4 [1]).  All  sampling
and other microcosm operations (water exchange, etc.) must be
performed using the gloved ports mounted in the front plexiglass
covers.  All samples must be placed into bottles, tightly sealed
and decontaminated in the air lock before removal from the test
chamber.  Likewise, all sampling materials (pipettes, forceps, etc.)
must be decontaminated before removal from the test chamber.  The
samples must be opened and analyzed at an appropriately equipped
site remote from the test chambers.
(2)  Water  samples, to determine test organism levels in the water
column, should be taken through the sampling port in the plexiglass
microcosm cover.  All such samples must be tightly sealed before
removal from the microcosm test chamber.  Water samples should be
taken  prior to the water exchange on those days when water exchange
is scheduled.  (3)  Water samples for test organism analysis must
be collected:  (a) While the turbulence (paddle) system is operating.
(b) At a point at least three centimeters from the side of the tank
and 10 centimeters below the air-water interface.
(4)  Representative samples of the various zooplankton species
should be collected once a week (see Section 5.6.6 [4]) to analyze
for uptake  and accumulation of the test organism  .  These samples
will be collected with the water exchange flask at a rate to
preclude zooplankton avoidance.  The sample  is then passed through
the zooplankton collector (Figures 1,7).  The water, after passing
through the collector, drains into the waste water tank and is
decontaminated.  The zooplankton sample is rinsed with filtered
                             50

-------
       sea water  and  drained  into  sample  bottles.  The bottles are tightly
       capped  and  decontaminated before removal  for analysis.  As with
       all other  sampling  procedures,  access  to  the zooplankton sampler
       is gained  through the  air lock  and  gloved ports in the waste water
       chamber.
       (5)   Potential  transport  of the test  organism to the atmosphere by
       aerosolization should  be  tested prior  to  water exchanges and prior
       to sacrificing the  tanks  (5.6.4 [1])  at days 10, 20, and 30.  The
       test  organism  is  collected  on  a membrane  filter inserted in the
       air vacuum line leaving the plexiglass tank cover  (Figure 7).  The
       duration  of sampling  must be sufficient to collect a representative
       sample  while not  exceeding  the life expectancy of  the test organism
       on the  membrane filter.  This  will  be  a conservative estimate of
       the aerosolization  and subsequent  gas  phase transport because
       there is  no microcosm simulation of wave  activity.  Methods of
       analysis  to establish the presence of  the test organism in aerosols
       will  be dependent upon the  characteristics of the  test organism.
       (6)   All  samples  for  test organism analysis should be processed
       in a  time  frame consistent  with the life  expectancy of the test
       organism  in the sample.
5.6.6  Ecological  Effects  Sampling
       (1)   During the operation of the definitive test,  the plexiglass
       covers  of  both the  microcosm tank  and  the test facility  (Figure  1)
       are installed  and all  biological and chemical samples collected
       either  from the waste water vacuum flask  or through the sampling
       port  in the plexiglass cover.
       (2)   All  samples  should be  taken from at  least 10  cm below the
                                    51

-------
water surface and away from the side of the tank.  Sampling must
be performed with the paddle system in operation.
(3)  The following ecological  information is considered to be
essential:
(a)  Identification of all  benthic organisms reported in
     numbers/m  per species.
(b)  Zooplankton_(including transient larval forms) abundance in
     numbers/liter per life stage per species.
(c)  Phytoplankton abundance in numbers/ml per species.
(d)  Ammonia levels in micro moles N/liter.
(e)  Ammonia flux rates from the sediment in ugat N/m /hr.
(f)  Oxygen uptake rates by the sediment in mg 02/1/m /hr.
Additional analyses such as bacteria counts or growth measures
of benthic organism.may be performed depending on conditions in
the  natural system being simulated and the analytical resources
available to the  investigators.
(4)  The type of  biological sample, volume of sample, collection
frequency, method of collection and analysis are listed below.
All  samples must  be placed in appropriate containers and sealed
before  being removed from from the microcosm facility.
(a)  Two milliliter phytoplankton samples are collected through
the  sampling port in the tank cover.  The algae are counted and
identified with methods described by Utermohl (1931).
(b)  Zooplankton  samples are collected twice weekly.  Two  liters
from the waste water flask are passed through, and the organisms
collected on, a 28 urn mesh nylon screen  (Figures 1,7).  The
zooplankton is rinsed into a collection  bottle and preserved for
                             52

-------
       numerical  counting.   Numbers  and species  composition are determined
       by examination  under  a dissection microscope.  Wastewater from the
       2 liter  sample  drains into  the waste water  holding tank for sub-
       sequent  decontamination  and disposal.
       (c)   Ammonia level  in the water column  is determined once a week.
       Twenty milliliter  samples,  collected with a  syringe through the
       sampling ports, are analyzed  colorimetrically  (Slawyk and Maclsaac
       1972).
       (d)   Ammonia flux  rates  from  the benthic  box cores are measured
       at the time  of  tank sacrifice.  After the cover  is removed water
       flow to  the  benthic cylinders is halted for  one  to three hours
       (length  of the  incubation period is inversely  related to temperature)
       The  diffuser is removed  and a thin  plastic  cover is floated on the
       water surface of the  benthic  cylinder.  Water  samples of 20
       milliliters  are collected at  the start  and  conclusion of the
       incubation period.   Analysis  for ammonia  is  identical to (c) above.
       (e)   Samples for oxygen  uptake (or  release)  are  taken at the same
       time as  those for  ammonia flux.  Fifty  milliliter water samples are
       collected with  a syringe and  overflowed (to the  tank) into 20 ML BOD
       bottles.  A  modification of the Azide Modification  (Standard Methods,
       1976) (0.1 ml of KI and  MgS04 and 0.2 ml  of H2S04) is used to prepare
       the  sample.   The samples are  titrated with  a microburet.  Results
       are  reported as the flux of oxygen  in mg  02/l/m2/hr.
5.6.7   Procedure for Final  Microcosm Sampling
       (1)   The plexiglass tank covers are removed from the appropriate tanks,
       after routine sampling has  been performed,  on  days  10,  20, and 30.
       Cover removal is accomplished via the gloved ports.
                                     53

-------
(2)  Those microcosm tanks that have been selected for sacrifice
and sampling at days 10 and 20 (Section 5.6.4 [1]) and all  remaining
tanks following the exposure period must have the following samples
taken, sealed in bottles, decontaminated and removed from the test
chamber.
(a)  Triplicate sediment sub-cores (2.5 cm diam. x 10 cm deep) to
determine the vertical  distribution of the test organism in the
benthic substrate.  These cores include the sediment and associated
biota.
(b)  The overlying water from the benthic box is removed with a
syringe.  The top one-to-two centimeters of sediment remaining in
the benthic box are removed and sealed in bottles for subsequent
screening.
(c)  Estimates of the amount of test organism accumulated on the
microcosm surfaces are made at the time of the tank sacrifice.
Replicate samples of the suspended fiberglass disks (4.2.1 [7])
are sealed in vials and removed for analysis.
(3)  After all samples have been collected and removed from the
test chamber, sufficient disinfectant is added to the two tanks
and benthic boxes to kill the test organisms therein.  These
decontaminated tanks are recovered and left untouched until the
end of the experimental period.
(4)   If a steady state condition of the test organism concentration
in the water column is achieved by day 30 the three remaining
exposed tanks will be sacrificed and sampled as described in Sect.
5.6.7  to determine the fate and mechanism of effect of the test
organism in the affected ecological compartment.  Otherwise, the
                             54

-------
       test,  with  the  remaining  six tanks,  will  be  extended  to 60 days
       and  sampled as  prescribed in Section 5.6.7.
       (5)   At  the conclusion  of the experiment,  disinfectant is added
       to  the waterbath,  all  interior surfaces  of all test chambers, air
       locks, replacement and  waste water chambers.  The  covers of the
       tanks  and test  chambers can then  be  removed, water and sediment
       discarded after growth  detection  tests show  the  absence of test
       organism within the system.
5.7    Waste Disposal
5.7.1  Liquid and solid wastes generated through sampling and water
       turnover must be collected and held  until  decontamination treat-
       ments have rendered the test organism safe for disposal.
5.7.2  Sufficient volumes of the disinfectant (Section  5.5.5) must be
       used to  decontaminate the water in the exposed microcosm tanks.
5.7.3  Contaminated solid wastes such as sediment,  filters,  charcoal,
       ion exchange resin, glassware, gloves, etc,  must be disinfected
       before disposal.  If the disinfectant is a toxic material it  must
       be disposed in  an appropriate manner.
6.     DATA ANALYSIS
6.1    Ecological  Effects Analysis
       Analysis of variance procedures (Steel and Torrie 1960)  and
       regression techniques (Snedecor and Cochran  1980)  should  be  used
       to analyze all  data.  The level of significance  is set  at the 5%
       level  (a = 0.05) unless otherwise defined.  Documentation of  all
       analysis used in the study must be provided.
6.1.1  Test Organism Effects:   Perturbed Case
       The model of repeated measures, analysis of variance  or  a completely
                                    55

-------
       random design will  be used to detect differences in the 30 day



       (and if necessary,  60 day) responses due to the test organism



       relative to the laboratory control  set.   The specific replicates



       for the laboratory  control set will  depend on the results of



       6.1.2.



6.2    Test Organism Fate  Analysis



       The analysis should consist of two  phases.  First,  determine the



       total biomass (density)  of the test  organism in the various



       microcosm compartments (water, surface microlayer,  sediment,



       aerosol and microcosm surfaces).   This includes attempts to document



       the presence of the test organism in the control tanks.  A standard



       regression analysis should be performed  on all  time series data to



       determine if the test organism is increasing or decreasing relative



       to the addition rate.  Secondly,  the investigators  should establish



       whether the means and associated  variances of each  compartment are



       independent of one  another.  If dependence is found, then appropriate



       transformations (e.g., Log 10) should be applied so that the independ-



       ence assumption can be satisfied.  Statistical  analyses are performed



       on the transformed  data, if necessary, to test for  differences



       between control and exposed sets.



6.3    Fate of Test Organism



       Determine the concentration of the  test organism in the following



       microcosm compartments on days 10,  20, and 30.



       (a)  Surface microlayer



       (b)  Water column



       (c)  Sediment core



       (d)  Selected biota
                                    56

-------
       (e)   Microcosm surfaces

6.3.1  Fate Analysis

       Test for compartmental  differences in the concentration of the

       test organism from each of the compartments listed in 6.3.

       Establish a regression line and test for differences over time.

6.4    Transport of Test Organism

       Estimate the total biomass of the test organism exported from the

       gas  and liquid compartments via water exchange and aerosolization

       over the 30 day period.  Test for changes in biomass over time.

6.4.1  Transport Analysis

       Test for concentration differences of the test organism for each of

       the  compartments listed in 6.3 at days 10, 20, 30, and if necessary

       60.  Perform the same analysis as above for the integrated

       concentration of the test organism transported during the term
                         > •
       of the experiment.  Attempt to develop an expression that will

       determine the net growth of the test organism over the term of

       the experiment.

       GROWTH = (INPUT - (TRANS + SED + WATER + SML + WALL))

        INPUT = The total amount of test organism added during experiment.
        TRANS = The total removed during water exchange plus aerosol.
        SED   = The total found in the sediment.
        WATER = The amount remaining in the water column at test conclusion,
        SML   = The total measured in the surface micro!ayer.
        WALL  = The total adhering to tank wall (liquid and gas phases).

6.5    Bioaccumulation

       Compute both (a): the concentration of the test organism in either

       the microcosm animals and/or their specific tissues, in units of

       numbers/wet weight and (b): the ratio of animal or tissue

       concentration to medium concentration (Bioaccumulation Factor).

       Choice of species should be based upon commercial importance


                                    57

-------
       (e.g.,  hard  shell  clam or close  analogue)  or  known  or suspected
       linkages  to  man-based  food chains.   At  least  three  replicates,
       (each  from separate  microcosm  systems)  of  a given  species/
       concentration  combination should be  measured   if possible.
       Indicate  feeding type  in  the case of benthic  species.
6.5.1   The  choice of  medium,  for bioaccumulation  calculations,  will  be
       dependent upon the species feeding type.   If  the medium  is
       sediment,  the  concentration of the test organism in the  top 1 cm
       of the  sediment core should be used  to  define the  exposure  level.
6.5.2   Bioaccumulation Analysis
       Test for  test  organism accumulation  differences for selected
       (Section  6.5)  species.
6.6    Environmental  Assessment  of Test Organism
       Provide an environmental  assessment  of  the potential  fate and
       effects of the test  organism based on the  analysis  performed
       above  and literature findings.
7.     TEST PROTOCOL  BIBLIOGRAPHY
            American  Public Health Association, American  Water  Works
       Association, Water Pollution Control  Federation.   1975 Standard
       Methods for  the Examination of Water and Waste Water.  14th Edition.
       New York.
            Anonymous. 1984.  Biosafety  in microbiological  and biomedical
       laboratories.   Public  Health Service, Center  for Disease Control
       and National Institutes of Health.   U.S. Dept. Health and human
       Services, HHF  Publication no.(CCDC)84-8395, 1st ed.
            Perez,  K.T. 1983.  Experimental  marine microcosm test  protocol
       and  support  document:  Measurements of the  ecological  effects,
                                    58

-------
fate, and transport of chemicals in site-specific  marine  ecosystems.



Accession no. PB83-230854.  Technical  Information  Service,



Springfield, VA.



     Slawyk, G., Maclssac, I.  1972.  Comparison of two automated



methods in a region of coastal  upwelling.   Deep Sea Research,



19:521-524.



     Steele, R.D-G., Torrie, B.H.  1960.  Principals and  Procedures  of



Statistics.  McGraw-Hill Book Co., N.Y. 481 pp.



     Snedecor, G.W., Cochran, W.G. 1980.  Statistical  Methods.   7th



Edition.  Iowa State University Press, Ames, Iowa.



     Utermohl, H.  1931.  Neue Wege in der quantitativen  Erfassung des



Planktons. Verh. int. Verein. theor. angew.  Limnol.,  5:567-595.



List of Figures



     a) Figure 1   Experimental Microcosm Facility



     b) Figure 2   Paddle Drive and Speed Control  System



     c) Figure 3   Experimental Microcosm



     d) Figure 4   Air Control  and Supply System for Benthic Pumps



     e) Figure 5   Benthic Subsystem



     f) Figure 6   Exposure Chamber



     g) Figure 7   Microcosm Cover and Zooplankton Sampler
                             59

-------
                         SUPPORT DOCUMENT

Purpose of the Support Document
     The purpose of the support document is to provide a general rationale
for the specifications and use of the experimental  microcosm system to
determine the fate, ecological effects,  and transport of selected test
organisms in coastal  marine environments.
Rationale for the Use of Microcosms
     The fate and ecological effects of  an organism introduced into a given
ecosystem are necessarily dependent on both (a) the characteristics of the
organism and (b) the physical, chemical, and biological properties and
interrelationships specific to that ecosystem. Any evaluation of potential
environmental impact, therefore, must be based on data derived with these
complexities in mind. Ideally the microcosm of a specific marine ecosystem
should be as realistic as*Possible and allow for the:  (1) prediction of
ecological effects and test organism fate at the system level of organization,
(2) production of verifiable data, (3) standardization and replication
among different laboratories, and (4) application of standard statistical
techniques for data analysis.
     The microcosm methodology described in the Test Protocol is used as an
experimental, physical model of a specific portion of a natural ecosystem.
Much of the rationale for the design, conditions, and operation of the
microcosm system is derived from attempts to duplicate the biotic and abiotic
conditions of a natural system (Perez et.al., 1977).  This experimental
laboratory system meets the criteria listed above and should provide a pre-
dictive capability for assessing the potential fate and effects associated
with the release of a specific organism  into coastal marine environments.
                                     60

-------
Rationale for Microcosm Design
     Much of the rationale for the microcosm's materials and methods are
stated in the test protocol or are intuitively obvious. These areas will
not be covered in this support document.
     It is specified that the exposure and control microcosm systems be
physically separated. This is to isolate the control tanks and prevent
their contamination with the test organism.
     Since the microcosm test protocol is intended to be a site-specific
test simulating a marine system, a number of system components and experi-
mental conditions will be dependent on environmental conditions at the
site (natural system) being simulated. The physical variables are light
(intensity and photoperiod)(Section 5.6.2 [6]), temperature (Section
5.2.6 [7]), water turbulence (Section 5.6.2 [5]), water turnover rate
(Section 5.6.2 [10]), and  ratio of benthic surface area to water volume
(Section 2.1.1 [6]). The biotic components are the endemic water column
and benthic communities (Section 5.6.2 [1J and [3]).
     In the microcosm, environmental conditions of photoperiod, temperature,
turbulence, water exchange rate, benthic surface  area, and benthic pumping
rate are all established at levels that best duplicate conditions in the
natural system. Previous experiments (Perez et al., 1977) have show that
the field-derived conditions are essential in order for the biotic responses
of the microcosms to be equivalent to those in the natural system. Appropriate
light intensity, however, must be empirically determined.  Performance  of
the test at the temperature extremes of the natural system is specified
to insure that the test organism is exposed to the full range of expected
temperatures. This will allow better estimations  of the organism's fate
and environmental effects.
                                    61

-------
     The selection  of tank  volume of 140 liters (Section 4.2.1) is somewhat
arbitrary.  However,  this  tank  size,  and  associated box core, does result
in a representative  benthic component when  simulating most coastal and/or
estuarine ecosystems.  In addition,  the  inclusion, where applicable, of
a commercially  important  bivalve is  insured when the investigator uses
this protocol.   The  primary consideration should be that the tanks be as
large as possible while allowing for sufficient numbers of replicates
within personnel, space,  and/or monetary constraints.

Rationale for Test  Procedures
Test water collection and distribution
     The protocol requires  the use of a  water collection method which is
nondestructive to planktonic organisms (Section 5.6.2).  The application
of such a method insures that  any divergent behavior of the water column
communities between the experimental microcosm and the natural system is
due to microcosm effects and not the artifacts of the water collection
and distribution methods (e.g., pumping).  The simultaneous filling of
all microcosm tanks at the  start of an experiment (Section 5.6.2. [2])
satisfies a major assumption of the recommended analysis of variance
procedure (Section  6.1),  specifically, that the experimental units
(microcosms) are as identical  as possible prior to the application of the
treatment conditions (concentrations of  the test organism).
Test organism addition
     The manner of  preparation and addition of the test organism in a
stock solution is dependent upon the nature of both the test organism and
receiving water.  In general,  the test organism should be added in a
manner similar to that observed or predicted in the natural system.
                                    62

-------
It is recommended that test organism concentration be established at
known or projected field levels.
Sampling
     Simultaneous measurements of the test organism and ecological  effects
are prescribed for a thirty day period (Section 5.6.4 and 5.6.5).  This
sampling period enables the investigator to establish either the time for
the test organism to re-ach quasi-equilibrium or the degree to which
equilibrium is reached within the various physical and biotic compartments
of the experimental microcosm.  An extension of the experimental time period
(Section 5.6.1 [3]) is prescribed when the test organism concentration
in the water column has not reached a steady state.  This extension allows
more time for the test organism to reach equilibrium in the experimental
microcosms and, thus, permits more accurate estimates of test organism
fate.
Ecological effects
     Those measurements required to describe ecological effects  (Section
5.6.5 [4]) are dependent on the characteristics of both the contained
biotic communities and the test organism.  Ideally, a structural and/or
functional measure should be made from each trophic level.  It  is recommended
that additional ecological measures be made in those compartments exhibiting
significant accumulation of and/or exposure to the test organism.
Ecological fate
     Test organism compartments: The test organism is measured  within the
microcosms to establish whether the test organism is capable of  surviving
and being transported to adjacent environments as well as bioaccumulating
in man based food chains. (Section 5.6.4).
     Bioaccumulation of the test organism can result in subsequent  ecological
                                    63

-------
effects and may also be a potential  source for human exposure via direct
consumption or trophic transfer.  It  is  essential,  from a management
viewpoint, to be able to quantitatively define the relationship between
the amount of test organism added i.e., the input  function, to subsequent
bioaccumulation levels, trophic transfer,  and ecological effects.  Analysis
of sediment sub-cores is required to determine the vertical profile of
the test organism and, thus, exposure concentrations for some of the
benthic organisms. Field validation  studies have shown that the top one
centimeter of the sediment (Section  5.6.1) is where most deposit feeding
and associated bioaccumumlation occurs.  It is necessary to develop a
budget of the test organism throughout the course  of the experiment
(Section 6.2). This information will indicate survivability of the test
organism within the experimental  microcosms. The compartments identified
as essential to an organism budget are the overlying gas phase, water
column, sediment, microcosm surfaces and benthic macrofauna not included
in the sediment sub-cores.
Data Analysis
     One of the major features of the recommended  experimental design and
statistical analysis  (Section 6.1) is the  ability  to independently establish
the quantitative effect of the test  organism for all the ecological
variables measured. In addition,  the degree of divergent biotic behavior
between the control microcosms and the natural system provides a measure
of the validity of the microcosm responses to the  test organism.
Restrictions of Test Protocol
     Scalar dimensions (Section 4.2.1)  and simulation complexity (Section
4.1) limit the use and interpretation of results from experimental microcosms,
Specifically, the size of the microcosm results in the exclusion of
                                    64

-------
macrofauna such as fishes and large crustaceans. Since most, if not all,
microcosms are so restricted, such a limitation is characteristic of this
experimental approach. In addition, the microcosm in its present design
does not simulate the effects of ultraviolet light. Because the microcosm
light lacks the U.V. component of the natural system,  its possible effects
on survival, growth, and reproduction of the test organsim, especially  if
it accumulates at the aJr-water interface, cannot be estimated.

Support Document Bibliography
     Perez, K., Morrison, G., Lackie, N., Oviatt, C.,  Nixon, S., Buckley, B.,
and Heltshe, J.  1977. The importance of physical and  biotic scaling to  the
experimental simulation of a coastal marine ecosystem.  Helgolander wis
Meeresunters. 30:144-162.
                                    65

-------
                                  Summary
     Three laboratory marine systems  are  presented that may be used to
evaluate the impact of genetically engineered and naturally occurring
MPCA's on the near-shore environment.  The  microcosms,  one simple with
fish, shrimp and two molluscs,  one a  simulative assemblage of shallow,
intertidal organisms including  plants and another simulative assemblage
representing deeper water communities. The systems differ in complexity;
the simple system with four selected  species and the simulative systems
with populations and numbers of organisms as collected  in the environment.
They also differ in other factors  such as the manner in which water is
supplied.  The simple system is static, the near coastal  system can be
static or flowing and the deeper water system is maintained with flowing
seawater.
     Of the three proposed microcosm  tests, only the simple system has
been operated with microorganisms. The simulative systems were developed
for testing the impact of toxic organic chemicals and the authors believe
that these systems must be tested  with microorganisms before they are used
in routine testing with microbial  pest control agents.
                                     66

-------
                             FRESHWATER  SYSTEMS
AUTHORS:
       Richard L. Anderson
       Terry E. FT urn
       Paul  J. Franco
       Jeffrey M. Giddiflgs
       Gary W. Hoi come
       John W. Leffler
       Gary L. Phipps
       Lyle Shannon
       Carolyn L. Thomas
       J. David Yount
                                     67

-------
This section contains the following:


1.  Methods for conducting multi-species,  vertebrate and invertebrate
    freshwater acute tests with Microbial  Pest Control  Agents (MPCA's).
    Gary L. Phipps and Gary W.  Holcome,  ERL-D, Duluth,  MN  55804.

2.  A procedure for exposing stream invertebrates to microbial  pest control
    agents in the laboratroy.   Terry  E.  Flum and Richard L.  Anderson, ERL-D,
    Duluth, MN  55804.

3.  Methods for a microcosm test to determine survival  and ecosystem level
    effects of Microbiert  Pest  Control  Agents.  John W.  Leffler,  Dept. of
    Biology, Ferrum College, Ferrum,  VA  24088;  Lyle Shannon, Dept. of Biology,
    University of Minnesota, Duluth,  Duluth,  MN   55812;  Carolyn  L.  Thomas,
    Dept. of Biology, Ferrum College,  Ferrum, VA  24088; J.  David  Yount,
    ERL-D, Duluth, MN  55804.

4.  Methods for establishing microcosms  of a aquatic littoral ecosystems for
    determining safe levels of  agent  exposure.  Paul  J. Franco, Oak Ridge
    National Laboratory,  Oak Ridge, TN  37381; Jeffrey  M. Giddings,
    Springborne Bionomics, Wareham, MA  02571.
                                    68

-------
                                INTRODUCTION



     Interest  in microbial  pest control  agents (MPCA's) for insect  control



is increasing.  Concurrently,  there is an increasing need to develop  an



understanding  of the potential  for adverse effects from these agents  to



populations, communities and ecosystems.  The need is particularly  great in



freshwater systems because  of  the variety of habitats that may receive



biological control agents from either direct application or from applications



to land adjacent to water.



     Microbial control agents  are unique when compared to other pest  control



agents, because thay are alive.  Life adds questions of infectivity,  patho-



genicity and competition to the usual concerns of toxicity, decreases in



growth an reproduction and  adverse changes in population, communities and



ecosystems.  In a tiered evaluation system, the first step to develop an



understanding  of effects is laboratory acute bioassays.  The acute  tests



can be followed by chronic  life cycle exposures which examine reproduction,



growth and mortality.  The  final laboratory tests are microcosms, which are



designed to simulate outdoor systems.  In this report, systems which  were



developed for  chemical toxicity determination are described.  They  include



two laboratory systems that can test many species at one time and two



microcosm systems that provide the complexity of interacting populations and



allow measurement of system effects.



     The first test described in this section is a multi-species exposure



system that was designed to provide chemical toxcity data on a variety of



species from a single test.  In its current design a diluter is used  to



provide water  to 12 exposure tanks.  This system may be adapted for specific



MPCA use by reducing the number of exposure tanks and altering the diluter



or developing  other methods to deliver water and maintaining animals  in the
                                     69

-------
system.  The key item in this test is the mechanism for exposing eight or
more species.
     The second test in this section describes an exposure system for stream
invertebrates.  The exposure tank is a trough, about 10 cm wide and 13 cm
deep, that is turned in an oblong form to provide a continuous channel.
Physical.factors such as flow and temperature are controlled by a circulating
pump and a water bath. ,Direct exposure of animals can be accomplished by
enclosing animals in screen containers or by simple release into the tank.
The impact of sediments, rocks, or plants on the expression or toxicity of
an agent can be tested with this system.
     The remaining protocols in this seciton describe methods to produce
laboratory microcosms.  One system was designed to provide data on ecosystem
effects of chemicals but is being applied to questions of survival and
ecosystem effects of MPCAs.in freshwater systems.  The microcosm development
is started by collecting biota from natural  outdoor sources and establishing
animal stocks in the laboratory.  These stocks can be long lived, often
lasting more than a year which allows tests to be started at anytime.
Material from the stock tank is used to prepare the microcosm.  The microcosm
containers are one liter beakers which contain a sediment, nutrient
supplimented water and, after an equilibration period, stable communities
of primary producers, consumers and decomposers.  The method, shows good
reproducibility and has been field validated with chemical toxicants.  The
small size of the microcosms permits many to be used simultaneoulsy in a
small enclosure.
     The other protocol in this section describes procedures for establishing
freshwater littoral communities in the laboratory with materials collected
from natural  ponds.  This system was also developed to assess the effects
                                     70

-------
of chemical  toxicants on littoral communities.  The procedure utilizes 72

liter aquaria as exposure tanks and establishes microcosms by collecting

sediment and water from natural, outdoor systems and placing the material

with its biota into the aquaria.  This system has the advantages of easy

assembly, low maintenance and replicability.  Because the microcosms are

established from natural ecosystems, a site-specific evaluation of effects

can be established.

     In summary, this section describes four protocols.  The first two

systems can provide exposure data on many species at one time.  The two

microcoms systems can provide data on effects and expression of an agent in

complex environments.  However, a key consideration for all these protocols

is that they may be adaptable to MPCA registration uses.

     All the systems were developed to test chemicals using the endpoints

of death, reproduction or ecosystem changes.  None have been extensively

tested with MPCAs and all the writers acknowledged that research is necessary

before these systems can be used with the same confidence associated with their

use in chemical hazard assessment.

     The writers have identified seven areas that need to be addressed

before high confidence can be associated with MPCA use as follows:


        1)  Operation of the procedure with a specific MPCA
        2)  Endpoints
        3)  Positive Control
        4)  Quantitation
        5)  Dosing
        6)  Containment
        7)  Decontamination

     The primary research goal is to operate these procedures with an MPCA.

Because of the variety of MPCAs, it will be necessary to test the procedures

with an agent from each group of interest.  The  results of the  first

experiments may affect the other research areas  which indicate  a need for


                                     71

-------
comprehensive studies.  Each procedure has specific endpoints such as death,
reproduction changes or system effects.   Methods that measure other effects
that may be uniquely associated with MPCAs such as infection, pathogenicity,
environmental expression,  persistence and competition which may lead to
species replacement are yet to be developed for use with these freshwater
systems.  These methods can be developed through research or evaluation of
adaptable procedures duping the protocol evaluation.  The third research
need is the addition of a  positive control.  In the usual bioassay or
toxicity test, concentrations can be selected that will  cause a lethal
effect.  Because MPCAs are not general toxicants, many animals may not be
sensitive so it is important that the target animal (if aquatic) be tested
in the system to show that the system allows an effect to occur.  In the
multispecies tests, this may be done by adding a container with target
animals to the system.  In the microcosm tests, the target animal  could be
added to a test unit or a  separate positive control test unit could be
established to verify that the agent, at the test concentration, was causing
the observed effect.  Areas four through seven point to specific questions
that must be answered before the procedures can be widely used.  All risk
assessments require information of the exposure concentration and effect
relationship so quantitation methods for each system are necessary.  The
last areas, dosing, containment and decontamination are included to show
their importance and the need to have methods available before the testing
of an MPCA.
                                     72

-------
              METHODS FOR CONDUCTING MULTI-SPECIES,




VERTEBRATE AND INVERTEBRATE FRESHWATER ACUTE TESTS WITH MICROBIAL



                   PEST CONTROL AGENTS (MPCAS)
                                by
                  GARY L. PHIPPS and W. HOLCOMBE



               U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY



             ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY-DULUTH



                      6201 CONGDON BOULEVARD



                     DULUTH, MINNESOTA  55804
                                 73

-------
1.      SCOPE.
       This multi-species  test  procedure  was  designed  to simultaneously
       test 8-12 freshwater  vertebrates and invertebrates  against  toxicants.
       The toxicants include industrial organics,  pesticides and metals  and
       the procedure has  been used successfully  to produce LC50 data  on
       selected species (Phipps et al., 1985).   Since  it has not been used
       for testing Microbial Pest Control  Agents (MPCAs),  several  modifications
       will be suggested  to  adapt the procedure  to those unique MPCA  testing
       needs.   This procedure presumes a  working knowledge of aquatic
       toxicity testing so many basic concepts will not be included.   This
       procedure, used a  modified Mount-Brungs diluter (1967) with 5  experi-
       mental  toxicant concentrations and a  control, all duplicated.   MPCA
       testing, however,  is  different in  that the need is to determine
       whether a concentration-independent effect is caused by the MPCA,
       therefore any apparatus which will  provide an exposure concentration
       and a control is satisfactory.
 2.    APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
 2.1   1976 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part  31;
            D8888   Oxygen, dissolved in  water
            D1067   Acidity and alkalinity
            D1125   Conductivity
            D1126   Hardness
            D1293   pH
            D1426   Ammonia
            E729-80 Conducting acute  tests with fishes, macroinvertebrates
                    and amphibians.
                                     74

-------
2.2    EPA-660/   Ecological  Research Series
             3-75-011 Acquisition and culture of research  fish:


                      Rainbow trout, fathead minnows,  channel  catfish,


                      and bluegills.


             3-75-009 Methods for acute toxicity tests with fish,  macro-


                      invertebrates, and amphibians.



3.     SUMMARY.


       This procedure differs from standard acute toxicity tests in  a few


       key areas as follows:


3.1    The MPCA target organism may be tested simultaneously with  a  diverse


       variety of nontarget organisms that might be found  in the same body


       of water or area.


3.2    Several vertebrate and invertebrate species are tested simultaneously,


       yielding considerably more data for the time,  effort, and money
                         .. •

       expended.


3.3    All species are exposed in the same test chamber, in the same water


       column, assuring uniform exposure conditions for all tested species


       thereby decreasing test-to-test variability.


3.4    Warm and cold water species are tested together at  17° C, which is a


       recognized standard warm water test temperature (ASTM E729, 1980),


       and within the physiological optimum for rainbow trout (Lichtenheld


       1966; Lavrosky 1968; Dickson and Kramer 1971;  McCauley and Pond


       1971; Hokanson et al. 1977).


3.5    A self-starting siphon was used (Benoit and Puglisi 1973) which


       varied the height of the test water in the exposure chamber (Fig. 1)


       which effects water exchange in the Daphnia and Chironomid exposure


       beakers (Fig. 1) making the MPCA concentration in the beakers the
                                     75

-------
       same as that in the exposure chamber.


3.6    It was easier to distinguish changes  in  behavior and to determine


       the most sensitive species.


4.     SIGNIFICANCE.


4.1    This test was designed to produce an  acute aquatic toxicity data


       base for a minimum of time, effort and finances.  In addition,  the


       test organisms were selected for their diversity in representing the


       freshwater community, their ease of procurement, availability and


       ease of culturing.


4.2    Because all of the organisms in each  concentration were tested  in


       the same water columnm, species differences in toxicty became very


       apparent, the more sensitive species  were easily identified, and


       behavioral differences could be observed.


5.     QUALITY CONTROL.
                         .. •

5.1    Organisms.


       It is recommended that organisms be brought into the laboratory and


       acclimated to the dilution water for  at  least 2 weeks.  During  this


       time mortalities should be less than  10  percent in 2 weeks.  If


       mortalities exceed this limit, the organisms should be treated  for


       disease, destroyed, or new ones procured.  After treatment, the


       organisms must be reacclimated.


 5.2   Control Mortality.


       Control mortality should never exceed 10 percent per species per test.


       A test must be repeated if mortality  is  greater than 10 percent.


       Practically speaking, however, if any control mortality takes place,


       serious scrutiny of the test should take place to isolate the cause


       because the quality of the test is jeopardized.
                                     76

-------
5.3    Test Conditions.

       Test conditions must be maintained as close to constant as possible.

       Strict attention must be given to temperature, dissolved oxygen,

       fighting and any other variable which affects the well-being of the

       organism.  The ideal test has only one variable between the control

       and experimental treatments, so all the other variables must be

       controlled as closely as possible.

6.     FACILITIES.

       The test and animal holding systems must be located in a laboratory

       with adequate physical characteristics which include:

6.1    Water Supply.

       A water supply of satisfactory quality for aquatic testing must be

       available for the holding and test systems.  The water must be

       tested for adequacy.using methods described by APHA (1980).
                         .. •
6.2.   Electrical Supply.

       An electrical supply for powering testing equipment, dosing pumps

       and fluorescent lights must be protected by ground-fault-interrupt

       to protect the researchers from electrocution.

6.3    Air Supply.

       An-oil free air supply for aeration of the fish tanks and brine

       shrimp cultures must be supplied.

6.4    Temperature Control.

       Adequate control (^ 2° C) of room temperature is essential to maintain

       uniform test temperatures (+_ 1° C) in static test systems.  Water

       temperature control of dilution water should be sufficient to maintain

       the test water temperature within + 1° C.
                                     77

-------
6.6    Ventilation.
       Negative pressure ventilation  must  be  provided  to  assure the
       protection  of the researchers  from  MPCAs  or  their  products.
6.6    Effluent Water Treatment.
       Facilities  should include  a water treatment  system to sterilize the
       effluent to avoid an  accidental  environmental  release.
6.7    Sterilizer.
       A sterilizer of adequate size  to accommodate exposure tanks  and
       dosing equipment is  essential.
7.     EQUIPMENT.
7.1    Dilution Apparatus.
       Since MPCA testing uses only one toxicant concentration, a standard
       dilution apparatus is not  needed.   A variety of apparatuses  listed
       in EPA-660/3-75-009-  section No. 3  (1975) should work for MPCA
       testing.  The Mount-Brungs diluter  (1967) may be easily modified to
       give the one experimental  concentration  and  control,  by disconnecting
       4 of the 5 experimental concentrations.
7.2    Exposure Tanks (Fig.  1).
       Glass aquaria measured 60 x 30 cm deep with  a 17 cm standpipe and
       had a volume of 30.6  L.  Aquaria were  divided into six 16.6  cm x
       15.0 cm compartments  and one 10.0 x 30.0 cm  compartment with stainless
       steel dividers.  The  standpipe located in the 10 x 30 cm compartment
       had a self-starting siphon which varied  the  water  level in the tank
       by 2.5 cm to allow water exchange in the Daphnia and Chironomid
       chambers.
7.3    Daphnia and Chrionomid Exposure Beakers  (Fig. 1).
       Beakers were 250 ml  in volume.  Two holes, 19 mm in diameter, were
                                     78

-------
       drilled  opposite each  other with their centers  2  cm  up  from  the
       bottom.   These  holes were covered by  stainless  steel  screen  which
       was  silicone-glued  to  the outside of  the beaker.   The screen-covered
       holes  effected  water exchange in the  beakers  without  the  escape of
       organisms.   A wire  was attached (Fig. 1) to the beaker  and the
       beakers  were hung in the exposure aquaria so  that the lowest water
       level  in the aquarium  was 3 cm above  the bottom of the  beaker.
7.4    Snail  Exposure Chambers.
       The  exposure chambers  consisted of stainless  steel  screen cylinders
       10 x 3 cm diameter, closed on one end by stainless steel  screen and
       on the other by a No.  7 neoprene stopper.  The  chambers prevent the
       snails from leaving the water during  the testing.
8.     PROCEDURES.
8.1    Test Preliminaries.-
       	. .
       Once the experimental  concentration of MPCA has been determined,
       the  MPCA stock concentration must be  determined and  the stock
       prepared.  The diluter is then started and the  experimental  tanks
       filled with MPCA-laden water.  The test begins  when  the species that
       are  tested for 96 hours are counted out and randomly distributed  to
       the  exposure chambers.
8.2    Test Start, Day 1
8.2.1  The  test started at hour zero on day  one when the species were
       introduced into the different screen  chambers in the exposure
       chambers.  Records  must be kept of the following:  (1)  Mortalities
       for  each species at least once every  24 hours.   (2)  Agent information
       such as  purity, source, lot number, stock concentration and  nominal
       or calculated exposure concentrations.  (3) Water temperature.
                                     79

-------
       (4)  Dissolved oxygen.   (5)  Test  start  date and time.   (6)  Any  other


       pertinent information.


8.2.2  After the test is started with the species that will  be tested for


       96 hours, the Daphnia  that  will  be tested for 48 hours must  be


       cultured.  Adult Daphnia magna are isolated and fed,  and the time of


       isolation is noted.   Exactly 24 hours  later the adults are removed.


       The resulting young  Daphnia are then counted into the exposure


       beakers and hung in  the exposure tanks.


8.2.3  The third to fouth instar Chironomid larvae are placed into  exposure


       beakers which had about 1 ml  acetone-washed quartz sand previously


       spread on the bottom.   In addition, about 1 ml of midge food is


       placed into the beakers.  Once the larvae are in the  beakers,  they


       should be set aside  for 24 hours to acclimate and to  build tubes.


8.3    Day 2 Testing.
       —	      * •

       On day 2 or 24-30 hours after the test is started, the Daphnia and


       midges, as well as any other organism that are tested for 48 hours,


       are placed into the  exposure chambers.  A mortality count is made on


       the other species and  the dead are removed.  The water temperature


       is recorded.  Snails are counted at 96 hours.  Daphnia and Chrionomids


       are counted only at  48 hours.


8.4    Day 3 Testing.


       On day 2 or 24-30 hours after the test is started, the Daphnia and


       midges, as well as any other organism that are tested for 48 hours,


       are placed into the  exposure chambers.  A mortality count is made on


       the other species and  the dead are removed.  The water temperature


       is recorded.  Snails are counted at 96 hours.  Daphnia and Chrionomids


       are counted only at  48 hours.
                                     80

-------
8.4    Day 3 Testing.
       Mortalities are counted and the dead are removed.  Water chemistry
       measurements such as dissolved oxygen, alkalinity, pH and hardness
       are determined and recorded.  The water temperature is recorded.
       Exactly 48 hours after the organisms were introduced into the test,
       Daphnia immobilization and Chironomid and Daphnia mortalities are
       determined for each test beaker and recorded.
8.5    Day 4 Test Termination.
       At exactly 96 hours after the start of the test, the final count  is
       made on all species tested for 96 hours.  The snails are removed
       from their exposure chambers and mortalities are counted and recorded.
       To determine mortality, snails should be inspected with a binocular
       dissecting scope and the foot probed with a blunt instrument about
       paper clip wire size to stimulate movement.  After mortalities are
       counted, 10 control fish of each species should be ice-anesthetized
       and weighed to determine fish size for each species.  Removal and
       disposal of the remaining fish in the test now takes place, and the
       test system is cleaned in preparation for the next test.
                                     81

-------
                                 REFERENCES

     American Public Health  Association,  American  Water  Works Association,
and Water Pollution Control  Federation.   1980.   Standard methods  for  the
examination of water and  wastewater,  15 edn.  Washington, DC.
     American Society for Testing and Materials.   1980.   Standard practice
for conducting acute toxicity tests with  fishes, macroinvertebrates and
amphibians, E279-80.  Philadelphia, PA.
     Benoit, D.A. and F.A. Puglisi.   1973.  A simplified flow-splitting
chamber and siphon for proportional diluters.  Water Res. 7:1915-1916.
     Biesinger, K.E. and  G.M. Christensen.  1972.   Effects of various metals
on survival, growth and reproduction  of Daphnia magna.   J. Fish.  Res. Board
Can.  29(12):1691-1700.
     Brauhn, J.L. and R.A. Schoettger.  1975.  Acquisition and culture  of
research fish:  Rainbow trout, fathead minnows, channel  catfish,  and
bluegills.  Ecological Research Series No.  EPA-660/3-75-011.   U.S.
Environmental Protection  Agency, Corvallis, OR.  54 pp.
     Dickson, I.W. and R.H.  Kramer.   1971.  Factors influencing scope for
activity and active and standard metabolism of  rainbow  trout  (Salmo  gairdneri),
J. Fish. Res. Bd. Can. 28:587-596.
     Hokanson, K.E.F., C.F.  Kleiner and  T.W.  Thorslund.   1977.  Effects of
constant temperatures and diel temperature  fluctuations  on specific  growth
and mortality rates and yield of juvenile rainbow trout, Salmo gairdneri.
J. Fish. Res. Bd. Can. 34:639-648.
     Lavrosky, V.V.  1968.  Raising of rainbow  trout (Salmo gairdneri)
together with carp (Cyprinus carpio)  and  other  fishes.   In:  Proc. FAO
World Symp. on Warm-Water Pond Fish Culture,  ed. by T.V.R. Pillay, FAO
(FAOUN) Fish Rep.  44(5):213-217.

                                     82

-------
     Litchtenheld,  R.W.  1966.   Effect of light,  temperature,  and  gamma



radiation on the locomotor activity of juvenile steelhead  trout,  Salmo



gairderni.  Ph.D. thesis, University of Washington.



     McCauley,  R.W. and W.L. Pond.  1971.  Temperature selection  of  rainbow



trout (Salmo gairdneri) fingerlings in vertical and  horizontal  gradients.



J. Fish. Res. Bd. Can. 28:1801-1804.



     Mount, D.I. and W.A. Brungs.  1967.  A simplified dosing  apparatus  for



fish toxicology studies.  Water Res. 1:21-29.



     Phipps, G.L. and G.W. Holcombe.  1985.  A method for  aquatic  multiple



species toxicant testing:  Acute toxicity of 10 chemicals  to 5 vertebrates



and 2 invertebrates.  Environ. Pollut. (Series A) 38:141-157.



     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency:  Committee on Methods  for Toxicity



Tests with Aquatic Organisms.  1975.  Methods for acute toxicity  tests with



fish, macroinvertebrates, and amphibians,  Ecol.  Res. Ser., EPA-660/375-



009, NTIS No. PB242105 (National Technical Information Service, Springfield,



VA  22161).
                                     83

-------
GO

Species
Fathead minnow
Pimpephales promelas
Channel catfish
Ictaluarus punctatus
Bluegill
Lepomis macrochlrus
Goldfish
Carassius auratus

White sucker
Catostomus commersoni
Chinook salmon
Oncorhynchus
tshawytscha
Rainbow trout
Salmo gairdneri
Crayfish*
Onconectes Immunis
Leech
Nephelopsis obscura
Snail
Aplexa hypnorum
Daphnia magna3
Midge3
Canytarsus dissimilis

African Frog
Xenopus laevis


Source
Lab
Culture
Commercial
Hatchery
Commercial
Hatchery
Lab culture or
Commerical
Hatchery
Commercial
Hatchery
Commercial
Hatchery

Commercial
Hatchery
Commercial
Hatchery
Bait
Dealers
Lab
Culture
Lab
Culture
Lab
Culture

Lab
Culture
TABLE 1
SPECIES TESTED

Size or
Lifestage Age
Juv. 6-8 wks.
0.3-0.8g
Juv. l-40g

Juv. 0.2-2g

Juv. l-20g


Juv. Approx.
l-15g
Juv. 3-7g


Juv. 0.5-20g

Juv. 2-4g

Juv. <_ 1 year

Adult 1-2 month

1-2 instar 0-24
3-4 instar 7-8 day

Tadpole 1-4 weeks



Holding
Tank Volume
57L

530L

530L

57L


530L

530L


530L

530L

57L

57L

2L
2L

57L



Holding
Temperature
20°C

17°C

17°C

17°C


17°C

15°C


15°C

17°C

17°C

20°C

17°C
17°C

20 °C



Food
Type
Artemia
nauplii
Dry food2

Frozen Brine
Shrimp
Frozen Brine
Shrimp

Dry Food

Dry Food


Dry Food

Dry Food

Fish & Liver

Artemia
nauplii
Daphnia4
food
Daphnia
food
Artemia
nauplii


Feeding
Frequency
2/daily

2/daily

2/daily

2/daily


2/daily

2/daily


2/daily

2/daily

I/daily

2/daily

I/daily
I/daily

I/daily



Number Tested
Chamber
10

10

10

5-10


5-10

5-10


5-1

10

10

10

10
10

10


     1  May be held in same tank as bluegills.
     2  Made to U.S. Fish  and Wildlife Specifications.
     3  Reared in  static conditions.
     *  Biesinger  and  Christensen  1972.

-------
             A  PROCEDURE  FOR  EXPOSING STREAM INVERTEBRATES  TO



             MICROBIAL  PEST CONTROL AGENTS IN THE  LABORATORY
                                    by
                  Terry E.  Flum and Richard L. Anderson^



                   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency



                 Environmental  Research Laboratory-Duluth



                          6201  Congdon Boulevard



                         Duluth, Minnesota  55804
^Corresponding Author
                                    85

-------
1.     SCOPE.

1.1    This method,  developed from experience obtained in toxicity testing

       of stream invertebrates,  has been  used to examine the impact of biotic

       and abiotic factors  on the distribution of a Microbial  Pest Control

       Agent (MPCA).  The  primary unit in the system is a stainless steel

       trough  and a  circulating  pump.  Each trough is about 2  meters long,

       13 cm deep and 11 cm wide.  The ends of the trough are  connected

       and the system is formed  into an oval  with an overall length of

       about 92 cm.   The trough  is filled to  a depth of 10 cm  and the pump

       circulates the water.  The stream may  be used as a simple bioassay

       chamber by enclosing the  test animals  in screen containers suspended

       in the  flow.   The stream  may also be used for more complex simulations.

       The complex studies  would be accomplished by the addition of sediment,

       rocks or other debris and animals would not be enclosed but allowed

       to move freely in the system.

1.2    Successful operation of this procedure assumes a knowledge of toxicity

       testing and an understanding of the techniques and procedures described

       in the following texts:

       1.  Standard Methods for  the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 1985.

       2.  1976 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31:

           D888     Oxygen, dissolved in water

           D1067    Acidity and  Alkalinity

           D1125    Conductivity

           D1126    Hardness

           D1293    pH

           D1426    Ammonia

           E729-80  Conducting acute tests with-fishes, macroinvertebrates
                    and amphibians


                                    86

-------
       3.   U.S.  EPA Ecological  Research  Series.



           660/3-75-009      Methods  for  acute  toxicity  tests  with  fish,



                            macroinvertebrates,  and  amphibians,



2.      SUMMARY.



       Wild-caught or cultured  invertebrates are enclosed  in  screen  containers



       and exposed in a  laboratory stream system.   Flow rates and  temperature



       are controlled and animals can be maintained  for at least 30  days,



       if  food is provided.   Effects criteria  may  be death or animals can



       be  sampled for analysis  by microscopy or  other techniques.



 3.    SIGNIFICANCE.



 3.1   Lotic environments range from springs to  shallow streams to rivers.



       These environments contain a  range of habitats that can receive



       inputs of MPCAs from planned  and  accidental  events.  Unfortunately,



       stream invertebrates are not  often used as  test  animals in  the



       laboratory because of their need  for flowing  water.  This procedure



       describes a contained, controlled-flow test system.  It can be used



       as  a multiple species bioassay chamber or as  microcosm for  more



       complex environmental testing.  It is small,  low cost  and all



       equipment can be  reused.



 4.    APPARATUS.



 4.1   Facilities.  A holding and a  test area are needed in which  the



       animals used in the test can  be cultured  in the laboratory, collected



       from natural habitats or obtained from commercial sources.   If



       animals are cultured, then the systems used in the  culturing  will



       be  adequate or can be adapted to  maintain the collected or  purchased



       animals.   If the  testing laboratory does  not  culture invertebrates,



       then holding facilities  must  be established.   Designs and conditions
                                    87

-------
       for rearing and holding are available in reports in section 1.  Both
       facilities should provide an adequate water source, temperature
       control, and electricity for lights, timers and pumps.  In
       addition, the test area should provide a clean section for test set-
       up and an adequate waste treatmeant and clean-up facility.
4.2    Test System Apparatus.
4.2.1  Stream Chamber. -The streams are contained in stainless steel
       troughs, each about 2 meters long, 13 cm deep and 11 cm wide.   The
       ends of the trough are connected and the system is formed into an
       oval  with an overall  length of 92 cm.  In this form, each stream
       has a 60 cm straight section and curves on each end that have  a
       radius of 16 cm.
4.2.2  Temperature Control.  Stream invertebrates may be exposed at
       temperatures that are less than 20° C so systems that can maintain
       lower than room temperatures must be developed.  Options include
       cooling the test area air or using a refrigerated water bath.
4.2.3  Light.  Light is provided by wide spectrum fluorescent lamps at an
       intensity of 270 lux (25 foot candles).  A combination of Gro-Lux®
       and Vita-Lite® bulbs has been used successfully.
4.2.4  Circulation.  Water circulation in the trough is provided by a
       submersible pump.  In our system, a water bath was used and the
       pump  was located in  the water bath.  This was necessary because
       the pump can heat the exposure water.  The pump inlet line was
       constructed from PVC  pipe and positioned just below the surface on
       the side opposite the outlet pipe.   Water that passed through  the
       pump  passes through  an adjustable float gauge that allows  control
       of  flow  rates.   The water returns to the trough through a  dispersing
                                    88

-------
       orifice located at the water surface,  parallel  to the trough  bottom.
       In  our  system,  the oulet was constructed from a PVC  plumbing  "T"
       that was plugged on the ends of the "T" and had 3,  2 mm holes
       drilled to allow the water to be forced out under pressure.
4.2.5  Screen  Containers.  Stainless steel screen containers are recommended
       because of their durability.  The containers can be  constructed
       in  either cylinder or cube form with largest mesh size that  retains
       the test animals.  The design should include either  a built-in cap
       or  have another provision for capping.  The containers are placed
       on  the  bottom of the trough or suspended by hooks from the side  of
       the trough.  The containers should extend above the  water surface
       at  lest 3 cm.
5.     WATER.
       Test waters commonly used in bioassays or toxicity testing are
                         - •
       from wells or the surface.  The water should be uncontaminated  and
       of  constant quality.  Specifications for the test water are provided
       in  the  references in Section 1.  A common guide for water quality
       is  its  suitability for rearing Daphnia.  If Daphnia  can be reared
       or  if the water is adequate for culturing other invertebrates,  it is
       assumed be adequate for use in this procedure.  Water should be
       added to replace evaporative loss.  The water can be slowly added
       by  pouring through a tube directly in front of the outlet.
6.     TEST ORGANISMS.
       Selection processes for lotic test organisms should include a
       prediction of what populations will be exposed if the agent is
       directly applied for controlling an aquatic pest or what aquatic
       populations will be exposed if the material is applied to a
                                    89

-------
       terrestrial system.  If the preferred nontarget animals  are not
       available then substitutions should be closely related to the
       selected animals.  There are few commercial sources of stream
       invertebrates and local collections may be the best source of
       animals.
 6.1    Collection and Laboratory Acclimation.  Collection techniques for
       invertebrates include kick-nets, seines, screens and dredges
       (Merritt, Cummins and Resh, 1978).  After collection, the animals
       should be quickly transferred to the laboratory.  Special care
       should be given to maintaining the dissolved oxygen near saturation
       and providing a current through a portable aerator.  A record of
       the collection and maintenance procedures is essential.  Animals
       should be kept at the test temperature for at least 1 week before
       testing.  Dead, diseased or damaged individuals should not be
       used.
 6.2    Experimental  Design.  A minimum test would include one exposure
       concentration and a control that would receive no additions of the
       MPCA.  A position control  would be accomplished by a container in
       the exposure stream that contains the target organism (if aquatic).
       This is included to assure that the agent is toxic at the test
       concentration.  Each test  is done in duplicate so 4 troughs would
       be required.   If additional concentrations were needed, two troughs
       would be added for each concentration.
7.     PROCEDURE.
7.1    Preparation.   Some of the  preparation for an exposure must be
       completed  one  or two weeks before the test so the procedure will
       be presented  chronologically:
                                    90

-------
   -14 days - Test animal collections should be completed at least
one week before the test to provide time for acclimation to temp-
perature, food and usually a different water.
   -7 days - All  collected animals should be acclimated to the
test conditions.  Begin daily checks for animal health.  Monitor
dissolved oxygen, temperature and pH of the holding system.  If
reared animals ape being used, then monitor those systems to assure
similarity to the collected animals holding condition.
   -3 days - The troughs should all be filled and operating by this
day.  Dissolved oxygen, pH and temperature should be checked each
day.  These values must be stable for at least 2 days before the
animals are added.  All the screen containers should be cleaned
and sterilized.
   -2 days - Distribution of the test animals.  Two containers of
10 animals each are necessary for each trough so a total of 4
containers (40 animals) are needed for the minimum test.  To
prepare the containers for 1 species, carefully remove the animals
from the holding/rearing tank and transfer to a shallow white
enamel pan with enough water to allow easy movement of the animals.
Transfer small animals with a pipet or large animals with a piece
of screen shaped into a scoop to each of 4 beakers.  Continue the
process until each beaker has 10 animals.  Place labeled screen
containers into each trough and randomly select a beaker and gently
pour the animals into the screen container.  Continue until all
animals in each beaker are transferred and then count the animals
in each screen container.  Repeat this process for each species
until all the test animals are in the test troughs.  Most species
                             91

-------
       will  not  leave  the  water  but  caps may  be  required  on  the screen
       enclosures.
          -1 day -  Check all  the screen enclosures  for number and condition.
       Replace  any  that do not appear  healthy.   Select the streams that
       will  receive an MPCA.
          0  day - Check all the  animals before  adding the MPCA.  The
       methods  for  adding  the test  agent depend  on  the formulation (liquid,
       powder,  or granule) and other special  considerations  that cannot
       be forseen.   Before the addition, the  dissolved oxygen and pH
       should be measured. After addition, these same measurements
       should be made  at  intervals  that will  describe their  changes during
       the test.  Also,  a  schedule  for monitoring the agent  concentration
       should be prepared  before the exposure begins and  should be followed
       throughout the  exposure.
          +1 day -  On  each day,  the animals  in  the screen enclosures
       should be counted  and  recorded  along with any observations on
       fitness.  If a  sampling  schedule or a  decision that any "impaired"
       individual would  be removed  for analysis  has been  made, those
       animals  can  be  removed at this  time.
       The animals  should  be  checked daily until the test is complete.
       Exposures up to 30  days  have been  successful in this system.
7.2    Temperature.  The  temperatures  should  be maintained within +_ 1°  C.
       Temperature  measurements  should be  continually recorded.  Minimum
       requirement  is  a  daily measurement.
7.3    Dissolved Oxygen.   Aeration  should  not be necessary because of
       the recirculating  system.  Dissolved  oxygen should be measured
       before the test and daily during the  exposure.  At least one set
                                    92

-------
       of measurements  should be made throughout a 24 hour period  to
       monitor for sags in  oxygen content.   A preferred  system would  use
       a probe that measures oxygen content and an automatic recording
       system.
7.4    pH.  The pH should be monitored on the same schedule as the
       dissolved oxygen.  A continually recording system is preferred to
       spot sampling.
7.5    Feeding.  Feeding requirements may be specific for some animals
       and those foods  should be provided.   For many stream invertebrates,
       soaked hardwood  leaves (maple, aspen, alder, birch) are acceptable.
       The leaves are most  acceptable if soaked for up to 30 days  in
       control water.  The  leaves can be added directly  to the screen
       enclosures and replaced when only the skeleton remains.  If the
       containers are suspended, the fecal  material and  debris will  fall
       to the bottom of the trough.
7.6    Concentration Monitoring.  A critical part of the test is the
       concentration of the test agent in the system.  Before the  test
       begins, a prediction of the probable distribution of the agent in
       the system must  be completed and a sampling schedule must be
       devised to monitor these locations.   After the test starts, the
       schedule may change.
8.     QUALITY ASSURANCE.
8.1    Criteria for accepting a test rests on definite statements  and
       good judgement.   Chemical testing criteria include:
8.1.1  At least 80% of  the control animals survive.
8.1.2  Temperature deviation does not exceed 1° C.
8.1.3  Dissolved oxygen does not drop below 40% saturation.
                                    93

-------
8.1.4  pH does not deviate more than 1  pH unit.
       If a test is awry, good judgment requires that it be terminated
       and repeated.  It is critical, even in those tests, that the
       observations be used to improve  the next test.
9.     OPTIONS.
       The recirculating trough can also be the basis for a stream
       microcosm.  The basic system has been adapted to examine the fate
       of an MPCA in a more complex system and the impact of nontarget
       animals on the fate and distribution of an MPCA.  The basic system
       was altered by ttie addition of a sand substrate and rocks were
       simulated by unglazed clay tiles.  In the studies, beach sand was
       sieved through a 250 urn screen and rinsed in water before it was
       added to the troughs.  The sand  was added to a depth of about 3
       cm.  The unglazed tiles were used to simulate natural rock.  Each
       commercial tile was quartered to produce small squares, about 7.5
       cm on a side.  The tiles were inserted into the sand at about a 45
       degree angle, leaning away from the flow.  About one-half of each
       tile remained above the sand.  The tiles were centered to allow
       flow on both sides.  Twenty-two  tiles were placed in each trough,
       about 10 cm apart.  In the sand-tile system, free stoneflies
       (Pteronarcys) have been successfully maintained for 30 days.
       Other nonpredaceous invertebrates could also be added to this
       system.
10.    ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
       Many references are in the reports mentioned in Section 1.  Additional
       information about testing and maintenance of stream invertebrates
       can be obtained from the following sources:
                                    94

-------
 Nebeker,  A.V. and A.E. Lemke.  1968.  Preliminary studies on the



   tolerance of aquatic insects to heated waters.  J. Kansas Entomological



   Society 41(3):413-418.



 Nebeker,  A.V.  1972.  Effect of low oxygen concentration on survival



   and emergence of aquatic insects.  Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.   101(4) -.675-679.



 Anderson, R.L.  1982.  Toxicity of fenvalerate and permethrin to several



   nontarget aquatic invertebrates.  Environ. Entomol.  11(6):1251-1257.



Anderson,  R.L. and P. Shubat.  1984.  Toxicity of flucythrinate to Gammarus



   lacustris (Amphipoda), Pteronarcys dorsata (Plecoptera) and Brachycentrus



   americanus (Trichoptera):  Importance of exposure duration.



   Environ. Pollut.  (Series A) 35:353-365.
                                95

-------
                                References

     Merritt,  R.W.,  Cummins,  K.W.,  and V.H.  Resh.   1978.   Collecting,
Sampling and Rearing Methods  for Aquatic Insects.   In:   An Introduction
to the Aquatic Insects  of North America, Ed.  R.W.  Merritt  and K.W.  Cummins,
Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co.,  Dubuque,  Iowa.   pp.  13-31.
                                   96

-------
METHODS FOR A MICROCOSM TEST TO DETERMINE SURVIVAL AND ECOSYSTEM
         LEVEL EFFECTS OF MICROBIAL PEST CONTROL AGENTS
               John W. Leffler, Lyle J. Shannon,
             Carolyn L. Thomas, and J. David Yount
              U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
            Environmental Research Laboratory-Duluth
                     6201 Congdon Boulevard
                    Duluth, Minnesota  55804
                               97

-------
1.     SCOPE
1.1    Description of test.  This protocol  is designed to provide data on
       survival  and ecosystem-level  effects of microbial  pest control
       agents (MPCAs) introduced into a freshwater environment.  Such
       microbial  agents are those subject  to test regulations under the
       Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA).  The
       EPA will  use these data to assess the ecological  hazards an
       introduced microorganism presents to the freshwater environment.
            The  test systems are generic aquatic microcoms containing stable
       communities of primary producers, consumers and decomposers.
       Changes are monitored at the  ecosystem-level  to provide a measure
       of effect that is integrated  across population and community
       boundaries.
1.2.   Justification for test.  The  EPA has recognized for some time that
       evaluation of chemical  hazard to environmental systems requires testing
       at levels of the ecological  hierarchy above the single species level
       (Environmental Protection Agency, 1979).  A recent study by the
       National  Academy of Science (1981)  concluded that tests at the
       population and ecosystem levels as  well as single species tests
       "are needed before sound judgements can be made about the potential
       environmental hazard of any chemical."  The same conclusions apply
       to evaluations of the survival and  effects of MPCAs.
            This protocol  provides data which are complementary to those
       obtained  from single species  tests.  The main advantage of this
       protocol  is that it represents an increase in "ecological realism"
       over single species tests (Schneider, 1981).  It permits evaluation
       of effects on functional properties at the ecosystem level of
                                    98

-------
       organization.  Effects due to species interactions, trophic
       organization, and biogeochemical  cycling can be asesessed.
       Sensitivity of microcosms to microbial  agents may vary greatly,
       being either greater or less than sensitivity values obtained
       from single species tests.
            The microcosms of this protocol do not simulate any natural  system,
       but do posses certain functional  characteristics common to  all
       freshwater lentic systems.  Since many kinds of organisms are absent
       from the microcosms, commercially important species of fish and
       shellfish should be tested independently.  The test outlined in
       this protocol should be used as a first approximation in identifying
       microbial agents that are persistent and/or potentially harmful  to
       environmental integrity.
2.     SUMMARY OF TEST
            The purpose of the microcosm test is to determine fate and
       ecosystemlevel effects of agents  introduced into aquatic environments.
       This test assumes that certain ecosystem-level functions are common
       to all ecosystems and are not the result of specific taxonomic
       groups present in a particular system.
2.1    Test systems.  The test systems are aquatic micro-ecosystems
       established in one liter beakers  and maintained in an environmental
       chamber.
2.2    Durations of test.  A complete test requires twelve weeks.
       Microcosms are constructed and allowed to develop and mature for
       six weeks.  The microbial agent is then added and monitored for an
       additional six week period.
2.3    Measurement of effects.  Mature microcosms are inoculated with
                                    99

-------
       varying densities of the agent to be tested.  Effects of the
       organism are determined through periodic measurements of pH, Eh
       (redox potential), dissolved oxygen (DO) and 14C glucose decompositon.
       These variables are all correlates to such ecosystem processes as
       primary production, community respiration, secondary production,
       decompositon and nutrient flux.
2.4    Determination of-survival rates.  Survival rates of the organism
       are determined through periodic enumeration of the agent.
2.5    Output.  This test can provide estimates of minimum effect densities
       and minimum survival  densitites for the microbial  agent tested.
       It also provides data on survival rates and the magnitude of
       environmental effect.
3.     SIGNIFICANCE.
            The data generated from this test can be used to develop a first
       stage assessment of the ecological hazard an organism would present
       to aquatic environments.  The results of this test together with
       other early assessment data can determine the need for further
       environmental testing.
3.1    Importance of ecosystem level testing.  Ecosystem level tests
       provide an intermediate between single species effects tests and
       full scale environmental tests of survival and effects.  As
       Schneider (1981) and others have noted, they yield a more
       "ecologically realistic" estimate of fate and effects than do
       single species tests.
3.2    Significance of variables measured.  This protocol yields minimum
       effect densities for the test microorganism expressed in terms of
       the following ecosystem level parameters:-  pH, Eh, net daytime community
                                   100

-------
production (oxygen gain), night community respiration (oxygen
loss); and decomposition rate of orgnaic matter.  The procedure
also determined the minimum densities necessary for survival of an
introduced microbe.
     A deviation in pH and Eh may have significant impact on an
aquatic ecosystem.  Changes in the equilibrium of chemical species
may alter normal,nutrient dynamics with resultant impacts on the
biota (Schindler, et aj_., 1980).
     A deviation in the  autrophic and heterotrophic components of
an ecosystem could alter food chains with resultant impact on
species important to_ human commerce and recreation.  Because of
the laws of thermodynamics, energy is lost at each step of a food
chain.  A decrease in autotrophy at the base of a grazing food
chain may ultimately lead to a reduction in game fish biomass
several levels removed.  Similarly an increase in heterotrophy,
most notably by bacteria, may also decrease the food supply passing
to game fish at the top  of detrital food chains.  The decrease in
dissolved oxygen resulting from increased heterotrophy may also
adversely affect game fish such as trout.
     A deviation decomposition rate could adversely affect the
nutrient cycles of an aquatic system by altering the mineralization
rates of organic matter.  An excess of nutrients could lead to
algal blooms and lowered dissolved oxygen concentrations  which
stress game fish of commercial or recreational importance.  A
deficit in available nutrients could reduce primary productivity.
This effect could be passed through the food chain resulting in
reduced biomass of commercial or recreationally important organisms,
                            101

-------
4.     DEFINITION OF TERMS.
4.1    Microcosm:  A small  laboratory aquatic ecosystem containing primary
       producers, grazers,  detritivores, and decomposers and displaying
       the biogeochemical  cycling found in natural ecosystems.
4.2    Ecosystem:  A region  of the physical environment and its associated
       organisms.
4.3    Community:  A unit  composed of all the populations of different
       species occupying a  given ecosystem.
4.4    Population:  A unit  composed of all the individuals of a single
       species within a given ecosystem.
4.5    Primary Producer:  An appropriate plant species.  An organism that
       obtains its energy  from sunlight through photosynthesis (i.e., an
       autotroph).  In these microcosms all the primary producers are algae.
4.6    Grazer:  An organism which obtains its energy by feeding on primary
       producers.
4.7    Heterotroph:  An organism which obtains its energy from organic
       compounds manufactured by primary producers.
4.8    Detritivore:  An organism which feeds on dead oraganic material
       and its associated microbial community.
4.9    Decomposer:  An  organism, usually a bacterium or fungus, which obtains
       energy by breaking down the remains or waste products of other
       organisms.
4.10   Benthic:  A organism whose activities are  primarily confined to
       the substrate.
4.11   Planktonic:  A small, nonmotile or weakly  motile organism which
       spends most of its time suspended in the water column.
       of microbial test agent.
                                   102

-------
4.12   Treatment:  A group of microcosms treated with an identical  density
4.13   Oxygen Gain:  The daily increase in dissolved oxygen caused  by  algal
       photosynthesis.
4.14   Oxygen Loss:  The overnight decrease in dissolved oxygen in  response
       to plant and animal respiration.
4.15   Heterotrophic Activity:  An indicator of the density of the
       microbial population determined by the rate at which ^C glucose
       is decomposed.
4.16   Minimum Effect Density:  The lowest treatment level  at which a
       microbial agent causes a measureable ecosystem effect.
4.17   Minimum Survival Density:  The lowest treatment level at which  an
       introduced microbial agent can survive in a microcosm system.
4.18   Maximum Hazard Test:  A test to determine the effects of an  MPCA  on
       a nontarget species when appled at several times the manufacturers'
       recommended application rate.
5.     APPARATUS.
5.1    Facilities
5.1.1  Growth Chambers.  Microcosms are maintained in an environmental
       chamber under controlled conditions in order to enhance replicability
       and reproducibility.
5.1.2  Temperature Requirements.  Temperature is maintained at 20°  C within
       a +_ 1° C range.
5.1.3  Light Requirements.  The light cycle is set so that there are 12
       hr of darkness and  12 hr of light daily.
            Lighting is obtained  from "cool light" fluorescent lights.  The
       lamps are arranged  throughout the chamber to provide even lighting
       at an intensity of  about 500 f.c. (5381 lumens/M^).
            Microcosms are distributed among all shelves of the chamber and
                                   103

-------
       are spaced  to  receive  equal  lighting.
            One  replicate microcosm from  each  treatment  is  placed  on  each
       shelf of  the chamber.   This  creates  a  randomized  block design,
       reducing  variability caused  by  environmental  gradients within  the
       chamber.  All  microcosms  assigned  to a  particular shelf are randomly
       situated  on that  shelf.
            All  microcosms on a  particular  shelf are moved  to another shelf
       within the  chamber twice  weekly.   This  rotation of microcosm within
       the chamber at regular intervals  also  reduces within-chamber
       variability.
            Microcosms remain in the environmental  chamber  at all  times except
       during brief sampling  periods.
5.2    Microecosystems
5.2.1  Vessels.  The  microcosm container  is a  one liter  pyrex beaker
                        .'
       covered with a large glass petri  dish  cover.   Because of the lip
       on the beaker, the system is not  completely sealed and gas  exchange
       with the  atmosphere can occur.   The  cover prevents contamination
       and minimizes  the chance  for acccidental  release  of  the agent
       being tested.
            Prior  to  use, the microcosm beakers  should  be washed according
       to the procedure in 10.1.2.
5.3    Monitoring  Instruments
5.3.1  pH and Eh.   A  pH selective ion meter with a multiple electrode
       switch is used to measure pH and Eh.  The meter  should permit  pH
       readings  to 0.01 pH unit  and Eh readings  to 0.1  millivolt.   Glass
       combination pH electrodes and glass  metallic (Ag-AgCl/Pt) Eh
       electrodes  are used to determine pH  and Eh of the microcosms.
                                   104

-------
5.3.3  Dissolved Oxygen.  A dissolved oxygen meter with two polarographic



       electrodes is used to measure die!  oxygen changes.  The instrument



       should permit DO readings to 0.1 mg/L.



5.3.4  Heterotrophic Activity.  A liquid scintillation counter calibrated



       for l^C counting is required for measuring heterotrophic activity.



       An instrument with an automatic sample changer and hard copy



       printout is recommended



5.3.5  Microscopic Examinations.  A good quality microscope is required



       to identify organisms in the microcosm inoculum.  While species



       counts are not a monitored parameter, assurance that specific



       functional groups are present is required.



5.3.6  Microbial Agent Enumeration.  Required equipment will vary depending



       on the agent tested and the methods of enumeration.



6.     REAGENTS AND MATERIALS.



6.1    Media



6.1.1  Water Quality.  All water used  in preparing media and replacing



       evaporative loss from microcosm systems should be distilled and



       deionized.



6.1.2  Stock solutions.  The chemically defined medium is a modification



       of Taub #82 (Taub and Read, 1982).  Stock solutions are prepared



       and stored at 4° C.
                                    105

-------
Stock Solution
A
B
C

D

E
F*


G*

H*





IA
IB
Compound
NaN03
MgS04.7 H2)
KH2P04
NaOH
CaCl2 or
CaCl2.2H20
- NaCl
EDTA
NaOH
FeS04.7H20
EDTA
NaOH
H3B03
ZnS04.7H20
MnCl2.4H20
Na2Mo04.2H20
CuS04.5H20
Co(N)3)2.6H20
AL2(S04)3;18H20
Na2Si03.9H20
g/L Stock ml Stock/L Medium
8.5 5
24.65 1
13.6 1
3.2
11.1 20
14.7
5.84 30
26.1
10.7
24.9
29.0
12.0
1.854
0.287
1.98
0.024
0.049
0.291
3.2 1
4.55 5
       * Combined  to make stock  solution J, consisting of:

                   25 ml. F  stock  solution
                   50 ml. H  stock  solution
                   6 ml. G  stock  solution
                   19 mL. distilled, deionized water

       This stock  (J) is added to  the  final medium  at the  rate  of  .05
       ml per  liter.

       900 ml  of medium are  required for each microcosm  beaker.

6.1.3  Media preparation.  At the  time microcosms are started the  appropriate

       proportions of stock  solutions  and distilled water  are thoroughly

       mixed in a  large polypropylene  container.    When  mixing  is  complete,

       the medium  will be quite  alkaline and must be  neutralized to pH

       7.0 with 10 percent HC1.
                                   106

-------
       Ideally,  the mixing container should be large enough to hold  the
       entire volume of media required.   If this  is  not  possible,  the
       media should be mixed in two separate batches, and  450 ml of  each
       batch added to each microcosm.   This will  ensure  that the media
       composition is identical in all  microcosms.
6.2    Sediment
6.2.1  Type.  Washed, fine-grained sand  is used as  a sediment.  It
       contains  no nutient matter, and  is used as a  substrate for  growth
       and a refuge for organisms.  Beach sand is acceptable if it is
       clean and not mixed with organic  matter.
6.2.2  Preparation.  Each microcosm requires 50 ml  of sand.  The total amount
       of sand required for a test is  placed in a container, covered with
       10 percent HC1 and mixed.  After two hours,  the acid is decanted
       and the sand flooded with distilled water.  The water is mixed with
       the sand  and poured off.  This  rinsing process is repeated  until
       the rinse water reaches a pH of  approximately 7.0.   After rinsing
       the sand  is oven dried at 75° C.
6.3    Stock Aquaria
6.3.1  Size.  Stock communities of the  organisms used in the test  are
       maintained in 38 liter all  glass  aquaria.  The aquaria may  be held
       at room temperature and should  be illuminated by a bank of
       fluorescent lights.  A sheet of  glass may be used to partially
       cover the top of the tank and retard evaporation.
6.3.2  Media.  The stock communities are raised in  T82,  the same medium
       as used in the microcosms.   The  bottom of the stock tanks  should
       be covered to a depth of approximately 10 cm with acid-washed
       sand.
                                   107

-------
6.4    Cleaning solutions.   The stock aquaria and all  microcosm vessels
       are cleaned according to the procedures suggested by Struempler
       (1973)  and Leffler (1982).   These procedures require laboratory
       detergent, 200 ,g/L  hypochlorite  solution and 10 percent HC1  (see
       section 10.1.2).
7.     SAFETY  PRECAUTIONS.
7.1    Use of  Cleaning -Solutions.   The solutions used  in cleaning the
       vessels should be handled with caution.  Rubber gloves and goggles
       should  be worn during the cleaning process.
7.2    Avoiding Release  of  Test Organism.  Of major importance in performing
       these tests is the use of proper  aseptic technique.   In addition
       to the  recognized practices associated with the handling and
       transfer of microorganisms  the following precautions should be
       taken.
7.2.1  Covering of test  vessels.  Microcosms are covered with petri  dish
       lids except during sampling.  This minimizes the possibility  of
       airborne transfer of the test microorganisms.
7.2.2  Sanitizing monitoring probes.  All  monitoring probes should be
       sanitized after use.  The sanitizing procedure  of choice will
       depend  on the microbe being tested.
7.2.3  Proper  disposal of vessels  and petri dishes.  All used microcosm
       vessels, petri dishes, stirring rods and other  glassware which
       come in contact with the tested agent microorganism should be
       autoclaved prior to  disposal or cleaning and reuse.
8.     MICROBIAL AGENTS.
       To determine minimum effect densities and minimum survival densities,
       the microorganism tested should be inoculated into test microcosms
                                   108

-------
       at a range of cell  densitites.
8.1    Determining Inoculation Densities.  Determination of the cell
       densities will be governed to some extent by the organism being
       tested.  If initial  tests at maximum hazard cell densities indicate
       no effects and no survival of the organism, further tests at lower
       concentrations are probably not required.  If either effects or
       survival are sees at maximum concentrations, further tests should
       be performed to determine minimum effect and survival  densities.
9.     TEST ORGANISMS
9.1    Establishing the stock tank community.
9.1.1  Aquaria specifications.  Stock cultures for inoculating microcosms
       are maintained in 38 L all-glass aquaria.  These tanks may be kept
       in the laboratory at room temperature.  Several banks of "cool
       white" fluorescent lights suspended over the tanks are
                         * •
       controlled by a 12 hr light-12 dark time switch.
9.1.2  Preparing the stock culture.  To prepare a stock culture, the tank
       is first thoroughly cleaned and rinsed (6.4).  Washed sand (6.2.2)
       should be added to a depth of 1 - 2 cm and the tank filled with
       approximately 36 L of microcosm medium (6.1.2).  Samples collected
       from natural ecosystems (approximately 2 L) should then be added to
       the aquarium.
       At least one new stock culture should be prepared every six months
       to ensure a healthy, growing system.  Inoculum from older stock
       cultures in addition to new "wild" material should be used to
       start a new culture.
       A stock culture may be used for several years  unless obvious
       changes suddenly occur in the the system.  Periodic additions of
                                   109

-------
       nutrient medium will  aid in maintianing a healthy culture.  In
       preparing inoculum for microcosms  samples from several  different
       aged stock cultures should be mixed together.  No stock culture
       less than three months old should  be used as a source of microcosm
       inoculum.
       Distilled water is added to the stock cultures as needed to replace
       evaporative lossss.
9.1.3  Source of organisms.   Samples taken from natural  ecosystems are
       used to start the stock cultures.   A variety of system should  be
       sampled in order to ensure a diversity of species in the stock
       cultures.  Suitable sources include small ponds,  marshes, vernal
       pools or other standing water sources.
9.1.4  Required functional groups.  The following minimum criteria must
       be met in terms of species composition in the stock cultures.   The
       diversity will most likely be far  greater than this minimum.
       (a) two species of single-celled green algae or diatoms.
       (b) one species of filamentous green alga.
       (c) one species of nitrogen-fixing blue-green alga.
       (d) one grazing macroinvertebrate.
       (e) one benthic, detritus-feeding  macroinvertebrate.
       (f) bacteria and protozoa species.
9.2    Evaluation of stock tank cultures.  Stock tank cultures should be
       examined periodically to verify the presence of the required
       functional groups.  Any groups that are missing should be added
       either by taking samples from other stock tanks or collecting  fresh
       natural material.
       If algae in the stock tanks appear to be-in poor condition (e.g.
                                   110

-------
        showing  shrunken  chloroplasts  or  reduced  chlorophyll  content)
        additional  nutrient  medium should  be  added.
 9.3     Minimum  time requirement for "co-adaption."   The stock  communities
        are  allowed to mature  for at least three  months  prior to  use as  a
        source of inoculum for the microcosms.  This  development  period
        allows a relatively  stable species assemblage to develop.   Those
        species  which are unable to coexist with  other members  of  the
        community disappear, leaving behind a "co-adapted"  group  of species.
10.      PROCEDURE.
10.1     Setup
10.1.1   Size of  experiment - Number of microcosms.  The  number  of  treatment
        groups will  depend on  the number  of cell  concentrations to be
        tested.   A typical chemical test  requires 30  microcosms.   These
        are  divided into  seven treatment  groups (a  control  and  five test
        groups)  each containing five replicates.  To  ensure that  the group
        of 30  is uniform  at  the time of treatment,  a  larger group  of 35
        microcosms is started  and culled  to 30  (see 10.4).
10.1.2   Vessel preparation.   Microcosm vessels  are  washed five  times with
        tap  water, five times  with 200 mg/L hypochlorite solution, five
        times with 10 percent  HC1, and five times with distilled  water.
        The  cleaned vessels  are kept inverted in  a  dust-free environment
        until needed.
10.1.3   Sediment.  Each microcosm receives 50 ml  of acid-washed,  neutralized
        and  oven dried (see  6.2.2) sand.
10.1.4   Media.   Each microcosm recieves 900 ml  of neutralized T82 medium
        (see 6.1.2).
10.1.5   Inoculation.  The stock culture aquaria are stirred gently to  bring
                                    111

-------
        all  particulate  matter  into  suspension.  A 1 L beaker  is  used to
        remove  aliquots  from each  stock culture.  These aliquots  are
        combined  in  a  6  L  polypropylene container.  Transfers  are handled
        gently  and never poured through the air because of  injury to the
        organisms.
             Prior to  inoculation, verify the  presence of each of the
        required  functional groups in this mixed stock culture.   Following
        this, microscopic  counts,  using a Palmer counting slide (Wetzel
        and  Likens,  1984),  should  be made to determine the  algal  density
        in the  mixed stock.  The algal density should be approximately
        10^  cells per  mL.   If necessary, adjust the inoculum to this
        concentration  with either  distilled water or aliquots  of  algae
        from more densely  populated  stock aquaria.
             A  stir  bar  is added to  the 6 L container which is placed on
        a stir  plate.   Stirring is just sufficient to maintain particulates
        in  suspension  without injuring the organisms.
             A  50 ml beaker is  used  to remove  50 ml aliquots from the 6 L
        container.   These  are carefully transferred to each beaker containing
        50  mL of  sand  and  900 mL of  medium.  Again care is  taken  in the
        transfer  not to  injure  the organisms.
             Each microcosm is  assigned a number which is marked  on the outer
        surface of  the beaker.
             The  microcosms are placed in the  environmental  chamber such that
        no  two  replicates  of the same treatment are located on the same
        shelf.   This creates a  randomized block design.
10.1.6  Cross-seeding.  Twice weekly for three weeks following inoculation
        all  microcosm  are  cross-seeded.
                                    112

-------
        Each  microcosm is stirred gently and a 50 mL beaker is used  to
        remove a 50 ml from the 6 L container and return  them gently to
        each  microcosm.
10.1.7   Reinoculation.  Throughout the life of the microcosm, each is
        reinoculated weekly using the procedure outlined. 10.1.6.
        Following the weekly reinoculation distilled water is added  to
        each  microcosm t« return its volume to 1000 mL.
10.2    Measurements.  Ecosystem level effects are measured through  periodic
        monitoring of the variables listed below.  It is  important that  all
        measurements be made at at the same time of day  during each  sampling
        period.  The following results must be reported  for each microcosm:
        (a) pH value to 0.1 pH units
        (b) pE value to 1 millivolt
        (c) Rate of oxygen gain 0.01 mg02/L/hr.
        (d) Rate of oxygen loss 0.01 mg02/L/hr.
        (e) Heterotrophic Activity in dpm/15ml_/2 hr.
        (f) Population density of the microbial agent.
        If the growth chamber lights are set to come on  a 8 AM and off  at
        8 PM, the morning measurements should be started at approximately
        6:30 AM, or early enough to finish before the lights come  on.
        Afternoon measurements can be started at approximately 4:30  PM,
        while the lights are still on.  The light regime must be  a 12 hr-
        on 12 hr-off schedule, but the on-off times can  be shifted from 8
        AM and 8 PM.  If such shifts are made, sampling  times should be
        adjusted accordingly.
10.2.1   Dissolved Oxygen.  Oxygen gain and loss are estimated by  the three-
        point diel dissolved oxygen method (McConnell, 1962; Abbott, 1966;
                                    113

-------
        Leffler,  1978;  and Hendrix  et  al., 1981).   Measurements  are
        scheduled  such  that morning and  afternoon  readings  are taken  on
        the  first  day of  a sampling period,  and  a  second  morning reading
        is taken  on  the following day.   The  dissolved  oxygen  electrode
        must be  standardized  against air-saturated water  before  each  sampling
        session.   The procedures are given by the  American  Public Health
        Association  (1975).
             To  measure oxygen  levels  in the microcosms,  the  oxygen electrode
        is inserted  into  the  center of the microcosm and  gently  stirred
        until  the readings stabilize.  A separate  electrode should be used
        for  the  control group (10.6.2).
        The  electrodes  should be thoroughly  rinsed with distilled water
        before being moved from one microcosm to another.
10.2.2  pH and Redox potential  (Eh).   Before each  sampling  session, the pH
        and  Eh electrodes should be standardized.   A separate set of
        electrodes must be used for the  control  group.
        Phosphate buffer  of pH  7 is suitable for calibrating  the pH electrode.
             The glass  metallic combination  (Ag-AgCl/Pt)  Eh electrode may be
        standardized against  the solution described by Light  (1972).  Both
        of these standards are  of  relatively high  ionic strength and  tend
        to slow  the  response  of the electrodes to  conditions  in  the
        relatively low  ionic  strength  of the microcosms.   Accordingly,
        both electrodes should  be  held in an extra microcosm  until readings
        stabilize before  beginning  the actual  sampling.
             A glass combination pH electrode  is inserted into  the microcosm
        such that its tip is  in the center of  the  beaker  halfway between
        the  bottom and  the surface.  The microcosm is  not stirred. The
                                    114

-------
        electrode  is  allowed  to  equilibrate,  usually  3-5 minutes, before
        the  reading is  taken.  Otherwise  the  procedures follow  standard
        practice  (American  Public  Health  Association,  1975).
             The  Eh electrode  is inserted into  the microcosm  such that
        its  tip  is in the center of the  beaker  halfway between  the bottom
        and  the  surface.   The  microcosm  is  not  stirred.  Readings usually
        stabilize  in  about  15  seconds.
             Since Eh is  influenced by  pH,  Eh values  should be  corrected to
        standard  pH 7 (Wetzel, 1983, p.  299)  by the  relationship E7  (mv) =
        Eh  (mv)  + 58  (pH  -  7).  The electrodes  should be thoroughly  rinsed
        with distilled  water  before being moved from  one microcosm to
        another.
10.2.3   Heterotrophic Activity.   Heterotrophic  Activity is measured  by the
        14C  method described  by  Wright  and Hobbie  (1966) and  Thomas  (1985).
        Sampling  is achieved  by  placing  the microcosm on a stir plate.
        A stir bar is inserted and rotated  at approximately 60  rpm.  A
        wide mouth pipet  is inserted so  that  its tip  is halfway between
        the  center of the beaker and the  wall and  halfway between the
        bottom and the  surface.   A 15 mL  sample is withdrawn.   If sampling
        occurs on  reinoculation  days, it  should precede the reinoculation
        procedure.
             A 0.3 ml aliquot  of 14C-glucose  (0.15 uCi) is added to  a  15 ml
        sample from each  microcosm.  After a  15 minute incubation period,
        the  sample is acidified  and incubated for  two hours during which
        C02  is trapped  on a strip  of filter paper  saturated with a C02
        absorbing  agent.   The  ^C  radioactivity of the paper  is then
        counted  by liquid scintillation.
                                    115

-------
        The stir bar and pipet  should be thoroughly rinsed with distilled
        water when  they  are  moved from one microcosm to another.
10.2.4  Population  density of MPCA or GEM.  Measurement of survival of the
        microbial agent  is critical.   The enumeration system will  vary
        with the organism being evaluated so specific procedures cannot
        be given here.
10.3    Pre-treatment monitoring.  Microcosms should be sampled twice
        during the  six week  development phase.  All variables (10.2) should
        be measured in each  microcosm on day 31 and day 38 of the pre-
        treatment period.
        In addition, well stirred samples should be withdrawn from each
        microcosm and examined  microscopically to verify the presence of
        the required functional groups.
10.4    Culling Procedure.  To  improve replicability, the initial  group of
        microcosms  must  meet a  set of quality control criteria.  Microcosms
        failing to  meet  these criteria or varying significantly from the
        rest of the group are culled before treatment.
10.4.1  Failure to  achieve minimum quality control  standards.  Microcosms
        failing to  meet  the minimum quality control cirteria (Sec. 11) for
        successful  development  are removed and not used in the test.
10.4.2  Calculation of group means.  After removal  of any microcosm for
        failure to  meet  minimum criteria, any remaining extra systems are
        culled by calculating the group mean for each of the ecosystem-
        level variables  measured.  Those microcosms showing the greatest
        deviation from these means are culled until the remaining group is
        reduced to  the desired  size (usually 35).
        The remaining set of systems is randomly assigned numbers, and
                                    116

-------
        arranged into treatment groups of five replicate microcosms.
        The  remaining set of systems is randomly assigned numbers,  and
        arranged into treatment groups of five replicate microcosms.
10.5    Treatment
10.5.1   Technique for adding toxic agent.  The method of adding the test
        organism will vary depending on its formulation.  It  may be added
        in dry form or djluted in a series of sterile blanks.  If media
        dilution blanks are used, an equivalent amount of sterile media
        must be added to each contol microcosm.
10.6    Post-treatment monitoring.
10.6.1   Schedule.  Microcosms are normally monitored for six  weeks  following
        the  additon of the test organism.  For the first two  weeks  all
        ecosystem-level variables (Sec. 10.2) are measured twice a  week
        (i.e., on days 2, 4, 9, and 11) with the exception of heterotrophic
        activity which is measured once each week.  Thereafter, all
        variables are measured once a week on days 18, 25, 32, and  39.
        If no deviations from controls are observed in any treatment  being
        tested for a two week period the monitoring may be terminated prior
        to the end of six weeks.
        Determinations of the survival of the microbial agent should  be
        made once a week on a schedule corresponding to that  of the
        heterotrophic activity measurements.
10.6.2   Use  of separate set of control and treatment electrodes.  To  avoid
        contamination of the controls with the microbial agent, a separate
        set  of electrodes should be used for all oxygen, pH,  and Eh
        measurements on controls.
10.6.3   Sterilization of equipment.  Waste disposal.  Liquid  wastes generated
                                    117

-------
        through  test organism additions  and 14C methodology must be
        collected  and disposed in  accordance with EPA,  NIH, and NRC
        regulations.
        Contaminated solid wastes  such as  biomass, filters, charcoal,  ion
        exchange resin,  vermiculite,  glassware, gloves, etc., must be
        packaged and disposed in accordance with EPA and NRC regulations.
11.     QUALITY  ASSURANCE.
        To assure that a test has  been successful, the  following criteria
        must be  met:
11.1    Pre-treatment criteria.  All  functional groups  should be present
        in the systems at the last pre-treatment measurement.
        By the end of the development period the morning dissolved oxygen
        levels should not fall below  4.0 mg/L and evening dissolved oxygen
        levels should reach,at least  11  mg/L.
11.2    Post-treatment criteria.  If  two control  microcosms become
        significantly different from  the rest of the control group, for any
        variable,  that control should be discarded and  not used for any
        calculations.
        If the microbial agent appears in  two or more of the controls
        the experiment should be aborted.
        If the microbial agent appears in  one of the controls, that system
        should be  discarded and not used in any calculations.
12.     DATA ANALYSIS.
12.1    Determination of minimum effect.  If the microbial agent was tested
        at several  initial cell densities  and at least  one of the treament
        groups showed no significant  effect a minimum effect or no effect
        concentration should  be estimated.
                                    118

-------
12.1.1   Dunnett's procedure.   Dunnett's procedure (Steel  and Torrie,  1960)
        is  used to determine  which, if any of the treatments are different
        from the control  (p < = 0.5).  This test should be performed  on
        each variable measured for each sampling day.   This permits a
        determination of which variables are significantly affected and
        the duration of the effect.
        These calculations may be summarized by plotting the difference
        (or deviation) of each treatment group mean from the control  mean.
        In  these figures the control mean appears as a straight line
        centered at zero.  An area corresponding to the upper an lower
        bounds of Dunnett's significant difference (p  < .05) is plotted
        around the zero line (control mean) and defines a region where the
        various treatments are not significantly different from the  control
        Points lying outside the shaded area are significantly different
        (p  < .05) from the control.
        From these calculations, the minimum and no-effect concentrations
        of  the microbial agent are determined.
12.2    Determination of Organism Survival.  From the periodic counts of
        the density of the microbial agent, determinations of the survival
        rate of the organism can be  reported.
                                 References
      Abbott, W.  1966.  Microcosm studies on estuarine waters.  I.   The
 replicability of microcosms.  J. Water Poll. Cont. Fed. 39:258-270.
      American Public Health Association.  1975.  Standard Methods for the
 Examination of Water and Wastewater.  American Public Health Assoc.,
 Washington, DC, 1193 pp.
                                    119

-------
     Betz, F., M. Levin,  and M. Rogul.   1983.  Safety aspects of genetically-
engineered microbial  pesticides.  Rec.  DNA Tech.  Bull. 6:4 pp 135-141.
     Environmental  Protection Agency.   1979.  Toxic Substance Control
Act:  Premanufacture  testing of new chemical substances.  Federal  Register,
March 16, 19079,  pp.  16240-16292.
     Environmental  Protection Agency.   1985.  Freshwater Aquatic Invertebrate
Toxicity and PathogenicJty Testing:  Tier 1 ln_ FIFRA Regulations,  Subdivision
M, Section B:  Microbial  Testing.  Washington, DC.
     Hendrix, P.F., C.L.  Langer, E.P.Odum, and C.L. Thomas.  1981.
Microcosms as Test  Systems for the Ecological Effects of Toxic Substances:
An Appraisal with Cadmium.  Final Report of EPA Grant No. R805860010.
U.S.E.P.A. Environmental  Research Laboratory, Athens, Georgia.
     Leffler, J.W.   1978.  Ecosystem response to  stress in aquatic
microcosms.  In Energy and.Environmental Stress in Aquatic Systems.   J.H.
Thorp and J.W. Gibbons (eds.), DOE Symposium Series, Augusta, GA,  Nov. 2-
4, 1977.  National  Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA.
     Leffler, J.W.   1982.  Microcosms  and Stress  Criteria for Assessing
Environmental Impact of Organic Chemicals.  Final Report, Battelle
Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio.
     Mallory, Larry M., Chang-Soo Yuk,  Li-Nuo Liang, and Martin Alexander.
1983.  Alternative prey:   A mechanism for elimination of bacterial species
by protozoa.  Appl. and Envr. Micro.  46:5 pp. 1073-1079.
     McConnell, W.J.  1962.  Productivity relations in carboy microcosms.
Limnol. and Oceanogr. 7:336-343.
     National Academy of Sciences.  1981.  Testing for Effects of
Chemicals on Ecosystems.   A Report by the Committee to Review Methods for
Ecotoxicology.  National  Academy Press, Washington, DC, 98 pp.
                                   120

-------
     Schindler,  J.E., J.B. Waide, M.C. Waldron, J.J. Mains, S.P. Schreiner,



M.L.  Freedman,  S.L. Benz, D.R. Pettigrew, L.A. Schissel, and P.J. Clark.



1980.  A microcosm approach to the study of biogeochemical systems.   1.



Theoretical  rationale.  In Microcosms in Ecological  Research, J.P. Giesy



(ed.), DOE Symposium Series, Nov. 8-10, 1978.  Augusta, GA, National



Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA.



     Schneider,  R.A.  1981.  Classes of ecotoxicological tests:   their



advantage and disadvantages for regulation.  In Working Papers Prepared



as Background for Testing for Effects of Chemicals on Ecosystems.  National



Academy of Sciences, National Academy Press, Washington, DC.



     Steel and Torrie.  1960.  Principles and Procedures of Statistics



McGraw-Hill  New York.  481 pp.



     Stotsky, G. and H. Babich.  1984.  Fate of genetically-engineered



microbes in  natural environments.  Recom. DNA Tech.  Bull. 7:4 pp 163-188.



     Struempler, A.W.  1973.  Adsorption characteristics of silver,  lead,



cadmium, zinc, and nickel on borosilicate glass, polyethylene, and



polypropylene container surfaces.  Anal. Chemistry.   45:2251-2254.



     Taub, F.B.  and P. Read.  1982.  Standardized Aquatic Microcosm Protocol.



Final Report, Vol. II.  FDA Contract 223-80-2352.



     Thomas, C.L.  1985.  Development of a Test System for Screening



Toxic Substances; A Comparison Using Organic Substances.  Ph.D. Dissertation.



Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, Blacksburg, VA.  183



pp.



     Wetzel, R.G.  1983.  Limnology.  Saunders College Publishing.



Philadelphia, PA.  767 pp.



     Wetzel, R.G. and G.E. Likens.  1984.  Limnological Analyses.  W.B.



Saunders Co. Philadelphia, PA.  357 pp.
                                   121

-------
     Wright,  R.T.  and J.E.  Hobble.   1966.   The  use  of  glucose  and  acetate



by bacteria and  algae in  aquatic  ecosystems.  Ecology.   47:447-464.
                                  122

-------
         METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING MICROCOSMS OF AQUATIC LITTORAL

         ECOSYSTEMS FOR DETERMINING SAFE LEVELS OF AGENT EXPOSURE1.2
                                    by
                              Paul  J. Franco
                           Jeffrey  M. Giddings^
                     Environmental Sciences Division
                      Oak Ridge National  Laboratory
                       Oak'Ridge, Tennessee, 37831
^-Research sponsored by the Office of Health and Environmental  Research,
 U.S. Department of Energy, under Contract No. DE-AC05-840R21400 with
 Martin Marietta Energy Systems, Inc.

^Publication No. 2750, Environmental Sciences Division, ORNL.

3Present Address:   Springborn Bionomics, Wareham, Massachusetts  02571
                                   123

-------
 1.      SCOPE.

        This protocol  describes  procedures  for establishing freshwater littoral

        communities  in a  laboratory with  materials  collected from natural

        ponds.   The  methods  were developed  to assess effects of chemical

        toxicants  on aquatic communities  (4), however,  the systems may be

        adaptable  to testing the potential  impacts  of microbial pesticdes on

        freshwater ecosystems.

2.      APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.

2.1      1976 Annual  Book  of  ASTM Standards, Part 31:

        D888        Oxygen,  dissolved in  water
        01067       Acidity  and  Alkalinity
        D1125       Conductivity
        D1126       Hardness
        01293       pH
        01426       Ammonia

 3.      SUMMARY.

        Littoral ecosystems  are  established in 72 L glass aquaria using

        sediments, water, and biota from  natural ponds.  The microcosms are

        easily  replicated and require little maintenance.  These microcosms

        are static systems (no inflow or  outflow) and retain a functional

        similarity to natural ponds for more than 6 months under artificial

        lighting.   In testing for effects of toxicants, at least five chemical

        concentrations, a no-treatment control, and a solvent control (if a

        carrier solvent is used) are recommended with replication.  Chemical

        (pH, hardness, conductivity, and  dissolved oxygen) and biological

        (e.g.,  zooplankton and bacterial  densities, and chlorophyll

        concentrations) are made periodically throughout the experimental

        period.  No-observable-effect-concentrations (NOEC) are determined

        using Dunnett's procedure.
                                    124

-------
4.      SIGNIFICANCE.



       Single-species laboratory tests are useful for measuring the



       relative toxicity of chemical pollutants, but a priori they cannot



       predict effects that may occur in natural environments.  The



       microcosms described here closely resemble, both structurally and



       functionally, the ecosystems from which they are derived.



       Responses of these systesm to chemical toxicants and microbial



       pesticides are likely to mimic those of natural communities.



       Such microcosms have been used in parallel experiments with outdoor



       ponds to evaluate effects of organic contaminants on an aquatic



       community (6).  The results from these experiments confirm that



       the microcosms may be used as surrogates for ponds in toxicity



       tests.



       The microcosms are easy to assemble, require minimal maintenance,



       are replicable, and are stable for periods of at least 6 months.



       Because the microcosms are established from natural ecosystems, the



       nature of the microcosm communities will vary with the source.  This



       allows for site-specific evaluation of toxicant effects.





5.     DEFINITION OF TERMS.



5.1    Agent - chemical or microbial toxicant for whose effects on aquatic



       ecosystems are being measured.



5.2    Littoral -  describing shallow-water habitats that are transitional



       between terrestrial and deep-water habitats.



5.3    Net Primary Production -  a measure of the net amount of carbon



       fixed by the community.  In the system described here, the carbon



       fixation rate is estimated from the net  rate of oxygen production



       (oxygen produced - oxygen consumed), allowing for oxygen diffusion





                                    125

-------
       into or out  of the  microcosm.
5.4    Overnight  Respiration  -   the amount  of oxygen  consumed by the
       community  during the 12  h dark period, allowing for oxygen diffusion.
       In this protocol, the  lengths  of  dark and light periods are equal
       and overnight respiration is assumed to be equal  to daytime respiration.
5.5    Ecosystem  Metabolism -  a measure of the energy balance within the
       community.  It is estimated based on the ratio of net primary
       production (P) to overnight respiration (R).   If P:R is greater
       than 1.0,  the system is  autotrophic  (fixes more energy than it
       consumes).  If P:R  is  less than 1.0, the system is heterotrophic
       (consumes  more energy  than it fixes).  Ecosystem metabolism exerts
       a strong influence  upon  chemical  conditions within the system.
6.     APPARATUS.
6.1    Facilities.   Microcosms  may be set up in either an environmental
       chamber or a laboratory  area with restricted traffic, to minimize
       disturbance.  Temperature should  be  kept relatively constant since
       the systems  will respond to rapid temperature  fluctuations.
6.2    Lighting.   Wide-spectrum fluorescent lamps are used to supply 150 to
       250 uE m2 s'1 (1050 to 1900 foot-candles) of photosynthetically
       active radiation (400  to 700 nm)  with a 12-h daily photoperiod.
       As is shown  in Figure  1, nine lamps  (e.g., Westinghouse Colortone
       50, high output) will  provide sufficient light for ten microcosms,
       with minimal hotspotting.
6.3    Aquaria.  The microcosms are contained in 72-L glass aquaria
       (40 cm deep  x 60 cm long x 30 cm wide).  (Smaller microcosms are
       difficult to replicate;  larger ones  take up too much space.)
       Before use,  aquaria and  all other glassware are cleaned using a
                                   126

-------
       nonphosphate detergent and are rinsed successively with dilute
       HC1,  saturated N32C03, and distilled water.
6.4    Sampling Tubes.  Glass tubes, about 40 cm long and with an
       inner diameter of 2 cm, are used to collect water samples.
6.5    Delivery System.  Chemical toxicant solutions can be introduced
       into  the microcosms using an adjustable volumetric pipette.
       A delivery system will be developed for each microbial  agent.
7.     MATERIALS.
7.1    Sediment.  Sediment is collected from the upper 10 cm of the bottom
       of a  natural pond.  In shallow ponds, the sediment may  be collectd
       using a shovel.  In deeper ponds, an Ekman dredge can be used.  It
       is best to collect sediments when ambient water temperatures are
       within 10°C of the temperture at which the experiment will  be
       conducted to avoid exposing biota to temperature shock.
7.2    Water.  Water is collected into clean plastic carboys from an
       undisturbed area of the pond in the same general location from
       which the sediment is taken.
7.3    Plants.  Macrophytes and/or filamentous algae are collected from
       the same area of the pond from which sediment and water were taken.
       Care should be taken to prevent overexposing of the plants to
       sunlight.
7.4    Agents.  Chemical toxicants should be of reagent grade.  Solutions
       of the toxicant should be made using distilled water or reagent-
       grade solvents.  For microbial agents, the strains tested should be
       of the same degree of purity and activity as those for whose
       release is anticipated.
                                   127

-------
 8.      PRECAUTIONS.
 8.1     Some chemical  and microbial  agents  have  the  potential  to  affect
        humans adversely if precautions are  not  taken.   Therefore,  contact
        with all  these materials should be  minimized.   Information  on
        toxicity  to  humans and recommended  handling  procedures should  be
        studied before tests are begun.
 8.2     Care should  be taken to ensure that  large  crustaceans, (e.g.,
        crayfish) are  excluded from  the microcosms.  The burrowing  activities
        of these  animals will severely disrupt the microcosms.
 9.      TEST ORGANISMS.
 9.1     The organisms  that would comprise a  microcosm  community depend
        upon the  source of materials.  The  dominant  organisms  in  microcosms
        described in reference 3 were El odea canadensis  (macrophyte);  Spi rogyra
        sp., Gonium  sp., Euglena sp., and Phacus sp. (algae);  Alona costata,
        Chydorus  sphaericus, and Simocephalus vetulus  (cladocerans); and  Cyclops
        spp.,  Eucyclops agilis, and  Macrocyclops albidus (copepods).
10.      PROCEDURES.
10.1     Microcosm Construction.  Up  to twenty microcosms can  be assembled
        by two persons in about 8  h. Sediment is  collected and sieved to
        remove large debris and stones.  The sediment  is distributed
        equally among  the aquaria  until each has at  least a 5-cm  layer
        (~10 L per microcosm).  The  aquaria are  filled with pond  water to
        within 2  cm  of the top.  The water  should be added so as  to prevent
        undue  disturbance of the sediment.   A simple device,  such as an
        inverted  beaker or a plastic bottle with holes punched around  the
        bottom, can  be used to dissipate the force of  the water.   If
        sufficient care is taken,  any suspended  sediment will  settle
                                    128

-------
        overnight.   Once  the  water column  is  clear,  about  100  g  (drained
        weight)  of  macrophyte or  algae  is  put  into  each  aquarium, and a
        portion  of  each plant is  gently pushed into the  sediment to anchor
        it  in  place.   All  other biota  enter the microcosm  along with the
        sediment, water,  or plants.
        About  7  to  14 d are required for the  microcosms  to reach an
        equilibrium.   Cross-inoculation during this  pretreatment period
        improves replicability among microcosms.
10.2    Temperature.   The temperature  range selected will  depend upon the
        communites  and conditions being modeled.  Caution  should be taken
        to  avoid rapid fluctuations in  temperature  that  might  perturb the
        microcosms.
10.3    Experimental  Design.   To  measure ecosystem  responses to chronic
        exposure and  determine safe levels of chemical toxicants, it is
        necessary to adequately define an  exposure-response curve.  Standard
        practice is to use a  geometric  series of five exposure levels and
        a no-treatment control (if a carrier  solvent is  used for the
        toxicant, a solvent control should also be  tested). Each exposure
        level  is replicated at least once, preferably two  or more times.
        The microcosms are monitored during all phases of  the  experiment:
        pretreatment, to  determine attainment of equilibrium;  treatment,
        to  measure  responses  and  post-treatment,  to evaluate recovery.
10.4    Application of the Agent.  For chemicals, the toxicant is dissolved
        either in water or an organic  solvent (usually methanol).  Appropriate
        volumes  of  toxicant solution are injected below  the water surface,
        using  an adjustable volumetric  pipette, according  to a predetermined
        schedule.   The pipette is moved around the  microcosm during the
                                    129

-------
        application to promote  distribution of the toxicant.  Methods of
        applying microbial  pesticides  will  be developed for each agent.
10.5    Water Chemistry.   Conductivity and  water temperature are measured
        in situ three times a week,  using  commercially available portable
        instruments.  Samples integrating  chemical conditions throughout
        the water column  are collected by  vertically immersing a glass
        sampling tube touwithin a few  centimeters of the sediment.  The
        top of the tube is sealed with a stopper and the tube and its
        contents are lifted out of the microcosm.  Samples taken from two or
        three locations within  the microcosm are sufficient to characterize
        the water chemistry. Hardness, ammonia, pH, and other parameters
        are measured from such  samples twice weekly.
10.6    Dissolved Oxygen.  Dissolved oxygen (DO) is measured using a DO
        meter twice daily:  at  its peak concentration (at the end of the light
        period) and its lowest  concentration (at the end of the dark period).
10.7    Zooplankton samples. Zooplankton  are collected by rapidly submerging
        a 2-L beaker into a microcosm.  The zooplankton are concentrated
        in a Wisconsin-type plankton bucket equipped with 80 micron mesh, stained
        with methylene blue, narcotized with Neo-Synephrine hydrochloride,
        and preserved in sucrose-formaldehyde solution.  Zooplankton are
        counted and identified  to genus or species.  Whole samples are counted
        unless debris or high  zooplankton  density make subsampling necessary.
10.8    Planktonic Bacteria.  Once a week  0.2 to 0.5 ml aliquots of 100  mL
        samples are stained with acridine-orange fluorescent dye and
        filtered through 0.4 urn polycarbonate filters.  Filters are examined
        by epifluorescent microscopy (2).   Bacteria in twenty 2500-um2
        fields are counted.
                                    130

-------
11.      CALCULATIONS.



11.1     Ecosystem metabolism is  estimated from diurnal  changes  in DO  (5).



        Net  primary  production  (P)  and overnight  respiration  (R) are



        calculated by:



                  P  =  A -  12 (D)  and R = B + 12 (D)



        where  A  is the increase  in  DO during the  day, B is  the  decrease  in



        DO at  night,  and-D = the rate of oxygen diffusion  into  the microcosms



        (units for A,  B, P, and  R are mg oxygen per  L water per hr).  The



        rate of  oxygen diffusion is related to the percentage saturation and



        can  be estimated by measuring the rate at which DO  concentration



        increases in an aquarium filled with sterile, oxygen-depleted



        water.



11.2     Weekly means of parameters  at each toxicant  concentration are compared



        with control  means ysing Dunnett's method (1).   Toxicant concentrations



        at which responses are  not  significantly  different  from control



        values are NOECs.



12.      QUALITY  ASSURANCE.



        Because  determination of toxicant effects is based  on comparison of



        treated  microcosms and  controls, it is necessary to establish stable



        control  conditions with  as  little variance as possible  among  control



        replicates.   Several  factors impact the replicability of microcosms



        and  care should be taken to consider these during  the conduct of the



        experiment.   Collection,  transportation,  and distribution of water,



        sediment, and  biota should  be done in such a manner as  to minimize



        stress on plants and animals.  Even distribution of collected



        materials during set-up  and cross-innoculation  during the pretreat-



        ment period  will  help reduce variability  among  microcosms.
                                    131

-------
        Adequate  and  uniform  lighting  will  promote development of similar
        macrophyte  communities.   Because  these  microcosms  are sensitive  to
        rapid  fluctuations  in temperature,  ambient air temperature should
        be kept to  within 3°C of  the selected experimental  temperature.
13.     REPORT
        The results reported  should  include the following:
13.1    Name of the test^. investigator,  laboratory,  and test  date.
13.2    A brief description of the toxicant or  agent,  including its source
        and lot number  or other identifying features.
13.3    A description of the  source  of the  sediment, water, and biota;
        the methods of  collection; and the  date materials  were collected.
13.4    A detailed  description of the  communities  that develop in the
        microcosms, including a list of  the dominant species  in each and
        any variations  among  microcosms.
13.5    A description of the  significant  or observable responses at each
        treatment level, including the NOEC.

                                 REFERENCES

      Chew, V.  1977.  Comparisons Among Treatment Means in an Analysis  of
 Variance.  U.S.  Department of Agriculture, Agriculture Research Service,
 ARS/H/6, Washington, DC.
      Daley, R.J.  1977.  Direct  Epifluorescence Enumeration  of Native
 Aquatic Bacteria:   Uses,  Limitations, and  Comparative Accuracy.  In
 Native Aquatic  Bacteria:   Enumeration.  Activity,  and  Ecology, J.W.
 Costerton and R.R. Colwell,  Eds., ASTM STP 695, American  Society for
 Testing and Materials, Philadephia, PA, pp. 29-45.
                                    132

-------
     Franco,  P.J.  et al.   1984.  Effects of Chronic Exposure to Coal-derived
Oil  on Freshwater  Ecosystems:   I. Microcosms.  Environ.  Toxicol. Chem.
3:447-463.
     Giddings, J.M.  1985.  A Microcosm Procedure For Determining Safe
Levels of Chemical  Exposure in Shallow-Water Communities.   Presented  at
the Symposium on Community Toxicity Testing, Colorado Springs,  Colorado,
May 6-7, 1985.
     Giddings, J.M. and G.K. Eddlemon.  1978.  Photosynthesis/Respiration
Ratios in Aquatic  Microcosms Under Arsenic Stress.  Water Air Soil  Pollut.
9:207-212.
     Giddings, J.M. and P.J. Franco.  1985.  Calibration of Laboratory
Bioassays with Results from Microcosms and Ponds.  In Validation and
Predictability of  Laboratory Methods for Assessing the Fate and Effects
of Contaminants in Aquatic-Ecosystems, T.P. Boyle, Ed.,  ASTM STP 865,
                         ^ .
American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, pp. 104-119.
                                   133

-------
                           TERRESTRIAL  SYSTEMS
AUTHORS:
        Ramon J.  Seidler
        Lowell Etzell
        Joe Gorsuch
        Pete Van  Von's
                                  134

-------
  "ENCLOSED SYSTEMS FOR TESTING



  MICROBIAL PEST CONTROL AGENTS"





                by



Terrestrial Systems Working Group



 Ramon J. Seidler, EPA, Chairman



   Lowell Etzel, U.C. Berkeley



    Joe Gorsuch, Eastmen Kodak



Pete Van Voris, Battelle, N.W. Lab
                135

-------
INTRODUCTION

    The United States Environmental  Protection Agency's Office of Pesticide
Programs is responsible for  providing registrants with protocols regarding
risk assessment issues for microbial  pest control  agents (MPCAs).  This
responsibility includes the new generation  of MPCAs, microbes modified
by recombinant DNA or other technologies  to produce genetically modified
microbial pesticides (GMMPs).
    Enclosed multispecies test systems could offer a convenient means to
conduct exposure assessments in habitat-simulating fashion eliminating
the need for environmental release of GMMPs during the test evaluation
period.  Some of the challenges in establishing protocols for the enclosed
multispecies test systems include the very limited database on effects
research involving GMMPs, the  lack  of appropriate bioassays for measuring
possible effects from GMMPs, and the modest experiences in maintaining
multispecies in  enclosed test systems.
     Virtually all that is available in the literature concerning multi-
species tests comes from toxicity evaluations involving the effects of
man-made chemicals on nontarget organisms.  Information supplied by the
participants of this working group strongly reflects this literature
database.  Information is provided on commercially available biota for
possible inclusion into an enclosed system and a considerable amount of
information is provided concerning the design and application characteristics
of one of the many terrestrial microcosms which have been described in
the literature.  The greatest challenge of this working group has been to
determine the selection of nontarget species, the number and population
size to include in any enclosed test system, how those species may be
                                   136

-------
maintained and for how long, and a lack of data to determine appropriate
end-points for measuring effects from MPCAs and GMMPs on nontarget species
and ecosystems.
ENCLOSED TEST SYSTEMS
    A terrestrial microcosm can be defined as a confined portion of a
terrestrial  ecosystem, subject to controls, that can be used to investigate
and evaluate ecologicaLprocesses (Van Voris, et al., 1985). Terrestrial
microcosms provide flexibility to the investigator in permitting the
control of numerous variables relevant to the determination of risk
assessment issues.  Microcosms are more likely to reflect natural  ecosystem
responses then most single species bioassays (Tolle, Arthur, and Van
Voris, 1983).  Single species assays will not reveal potential  perturbations
in population densities when certain predators, competitors, or ecosystem
functional activities are altered.  For populations of several  species to
exist in enclosed terrestrial microcosms, suitable trophic levels and
certain habitat simulating features must be maintained.  If predatory
insects are enclosed for example, a suitable and consistent supply of
prey, of course, must be included in the system.  This could complicate the
experimental microcosm if unusual nutritional requirements arise in
maintaining one or more predator/prey combinations.  Furthermore, one
should expect fluctuations in predator/prey numbers as a function of each
species density, stage of growth, growth rate and conditions under which
the microcosm is maintained.   How changes in beneficial prey cell numbers
can be specifically related to harm caused by the GMMPs will be a very
difficult issue to resolve since there are many factors which influence
their number.
     Terrestrial microcosms come in numerous shapes and designs each
                                   137

-------
offering the unique creativity of the designer and the novel purpose(s)
for which it is  to be used (see Figs 1-9;   Gillett, Witt, and Watt, 1979).
Discussions of this working group  did not consider in any detail  the
diversity of existing terrestrial  microcosms or microcosm technologies.
Discussions of the Working Group centered  predominantly on the Experimental
Terrestrial Soil-Core microcosm (TSCM) developed at Battelle, NW Laboratory
(Fig. 9).  The advantages of this terrestrial microcosm are summarized in
the following items.
    1.  The TSCM has been adopted as a standard by the American Society
for Testing and Materials and is an EPA/OTS terrestrial microcosm test
protocol for evaluating toxicity of chemicals (Van Voris, 1985;  Van
Voris, Tolle, and Arthur, 1985).
    2.  The TSCM is adaptable in terms of  sizes of the intact soil core,
the number of soil core units which simultaneously can be replicated, and
in the enclosure design which uses HEPA filters.
    3.  The experimental  design involves the incorporation of an undisturbed
soil core which maintains the natural biological and physical stratification
of the soil(Van Voris et al., 1985).
    4.  The TSCM can be used to evaluate a number of parameters relevant
to the risk assessment of GMMPs including: a) an evaluation of fate and
survival characteristics; b) genetic stability; and c) effects on nontarget
species and possible influences on various ecological  processes such as
niche displacement and microbial functional activities such as nutrient
cycling.
    The containment aspects of the TSCM have been anticipated in the
design which involves a Lexan® wall enclosure and a quartz glass top with
a stainless steel air-tight lower compartment to enclose the soil and
                                   138

-------
microcosm tubes.   The entire enclosed system is to be maintained under
slight negative air pressure and all air passing through the system will
be double HEPA filtered prior to exhaust.  Two HEPA filters of laminar
flow grades  with  99.97% and 99.99% efficiency would be installed in
sequence to  insure some 8-log reduction in particles of 0.3 urn and larger
from moving  out of the enclosure.  Since virus particles are of the order
of 0.002-0.05 urn  in size, an additional feature provides for installation
of an incinerator on the exhaust side of the microcosm to insure that
smaller particles would not escape.
    Additional features of the enclosed TSCM include the use of glove  box
type access  ports  and an ethylene oxide gas flush sample transfer chamber
(Fig. 9). Since the enclosed TSCM is on wheels it can be readily moved
between various environmental chambers. As designed, the TSCM meets the
BL-3 containment level guideline of the National Institutes of Health  for
research with recombinant DNA.  The estimated cost for construction of
two complete enclosed TSCM units is about $34,000.  The dimensions of
such a unit  are approximately 12 ft long, 4 ft high with about 32 cubic
ft of space  within the enclosure to accommodate 12 soil core units.  The
size of the  individual cores is approximately 60cm deep and 20cm in
diameter.  The depth is sufficient to allow for the establishment of
deep-rooted  plants.

BIOTA FOR MICROCOSMS
A.  Insects
    Many resource materials were provided to the working group including
a listing of 20 groups of beneficial arthropods which might be included
in a terrestrial  line missing details).  Information provided includes a
listing of commercial insectaries, source materials, as well as methods
                                   139

-------
for rearing both the beneficial  arthropods and, as appropriate, the

corresponding prey or host species of the beneficial  arthropod.  The

original list of 20 beneficial  arthropods  provided in Appendix A was

reduced here to those that are  most readily available and are easier to

propagate or maintain.  A list  which contains only a single representative

from each taxonomic group from Appendix A is summarized in Table 2.


Table 2.  Systems of beneficial  arthropods suggested for inclusion in
          risk assessment testing of microbial  pesticides.
SYSTEM   BENEFICIAL SPECIES

 #1      Amblyseius hibisci


 #4      Geocoris punctipes




 #5      Chrysoperla carneS


 #7      01 la abduminalis



 #9      Trichogramma sp.



#13      Lysiphlebus testaceipes



#14      Cotesia melanoscelus


#15      Metaphycus helvolus



#16      Aphytis lingnanensis
COMMENTS

a beneficial mite;
11 day life-cycle at 25C

big-eyed bug;  a variety
of food will suffice
including cabbage looper;
34 day life-cycle at 26.7C

green lacewing;
24-27 day life-cycle at 26.7C

apparently only available
by field collection;
15 day life-cycle at 26C

parasite of insect eggs,
primarily lepidopterans
8-10 day life-cycle at 26.7C

parasite of the greenbug;
not active below 18.3C;
13 day life-cycle at 21C

parasite of gypsy moth;
15 day life-cycle at 23C

parasite of black scale
13 day life-cycle at
27 ,8C

parasite of California
red scale;  17 day life-cycle
at 26C
                                   140

-------
Table 2.  (Cont'd)
#17
Brachymeria intermedia
parasite of lepidopterans
15-30 day life-cycle at 24C
#18      Lixophaga diatraeae
#19      Apis mellifera-
#20     Vanessa cardui
                              fly parasite on sugarcane
                              borer;  USDA mass produces;
                              18-20 day life-cycle at 26C

                              honeybee; freshly emerged
                              bees from a brood comb
                              should live the longest
                              in confinement (perhaps 30
                              days)

                              The only butterfly considered for
                              tests;feeds on over 100 plant
                              species; life of about 7 weeks
B.  Plants and invertebrates.

    The following list of plants and other invertebrates represents those

species commonly employed'"n enclosed microcosm test systems.  The species

are readily available from various sources such as seed companies and

biological supply houses (See Appendix B).
Table 3.  Plants suggested for inclusion in risk assessment testing
          of microbial pesticides.
   1. alfalfa

   2. clover

   3. oats

   4. ryegrass

   5. timothy
             6. winter wheat

             7. soybean

             8. tomato

             9. pine and Douglas
                fir seedlings
       10. corn

       11. cotton

       12. trifolium
                                   141

-------
     Table 4.   Other invertebrates and non-beneficial  insects suggested
               for inclusion  in risk assessment testing of microbial
               pesticides.

     1. cricket          3.  earthworm           5.  pillbug

     2. nematode         4.  collembola          6.  millipede
     Sources of the above biota are given  in  many of the  references

appended and a noninclusive  list of supply  organizations  is  provided

in Appendix B.
                                  142

-------
   FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN THE DESIGN AND EXECUTION OF MICROCOSM TESTS.

     In establishing the risk assessment of a GMMP, the working group
sees the need for duplicate enclosed microcosms.  Both microcosms would
receive suitable nontarget species as well as the target (pest) species
of the GMMP.  Only one microcosm would receive the GMMP itself.  Possible
effects in the negative control (no GMMP) would be compared in severity
and number to those recorded in the experimental microcosm.  One can
gauge the relative merits of the test by ascertaining rates of population
decline in the negative control microcosm.  One may also use population
declines in the negative control to assess the level of species compatibility
and general"health" of the microcosm.
    The materials used in the TSCM should reasonably reflect those at the
site destined to receive the GMMP in the small scale open field test.
Thus, the soil core shoultl be taken from this field site along with a
representative amount of natural vegetation.
    The lists of flora and fauna previously listed above are intended to
provide flexibility to the agency program offices regarding selection and
requirements of further nontarget species.  The number of different
species included in the microcosm tests should probably not exceed 5 to 7
added test species.  The workgroup  recommends that similar representatives
from the list of flora and fauna should be suggested to all registrants
for enclosed test trials for purposes of continuity of test evaluations
and consistency in agency requirements.  The  list of test species added
to the microcosm may include, as examples; a  grass, broadleaf and cereal
grain (e.g., ryegrass, alfalfa, wheat), cricket, and earthworm as well as
two or three species from the list of beneficial arthropods.  In addition
to the indigenous plant species taken with the soil core, these recommended
                                   143

-------
species should provide a reasonable measure of species diversity for
nontarget tests.  Higher species of organisms such as avian and mammals
cannot be satisfactorily maintained in this type of enclosed microcosm.
The possible effects of GMMPs on these species will  be evaluated in
single species tests.
    Inclusion in the microcosm  of the intended target species of the
GMMP is strongly recommended by this working group.   The target species
can serve as an internal control to verify the efficacy of the GMMP risk
assessment by making sure sufficient GMMP numbers were added to result in
an effective dose. The presence of infected target species will also
provide localized high concentrations of the GMMP which can therefore be
more "naturally" evaluated for ecological fate and hazards. If a pre-
determined population of target species is not eliminated, then the
enclosed microcosm risk assessment experiment is probably invalid.
      The kinds of evaluations and duration of the exposure tests in the
enclosed microcosm will be influenced by the nature and number of the
species introduced into the enclosure.  Thus, life-cycles of most beneficial
arthropods are greatly influenced by temperature and will be completed
within 3 to 4 weeks for most species.  However, the three to four week
life-cycle should not be considered as a short-coming of the microcosm
evaluation system.  The completion of life-cycles with sexual  maturity
and egg laying, could become a part of the end-points selected for
assessment of risks.
    Choices of stocking densities of target  and nontarget species repre-
sent a challenge.  Thus, stocking densities of plants may have physical
constraints and may be based upon common agricultural practices.   However,
insufficient experiences do not allow more than best "estimates" for

                                   144

-------
stocking densities of other species.  In the  20 cm X 60 cm soil core, it
should be possible to maintain 4 to 8 earthworms for several weeks, without
significant disturbance of the ecosystem.  On the other hand, densities
of suitable prey/host numbers will largely determine the population
density of beneficial predator/parasite that can be supported.  In a
space of-32 cubic ft perhaps 50 specimens of each beneficial arthropod
can be maintained if onJy two or three species are used.  Obviously  prey
or host specimens must also be provided.  This will necessitate adding to
the microcosm suitable nurse plants or other food sources for supporting
and maintaining viable prey or host specimens.
    It seems most likely that the major benefit of conducting enclosed
testing will be the information gained on the ecological hazards as
opposed to hazards involving toxicity, virulence, and pathogenicity
effects on non-target species.  The microcosm will provide a realistic
                         .. •
measure for testing the recovery of the GMMP from natural habitat material.
Furthermore, it will also be possible to gain information on the fate,
survival, ecological competitiveness, and genetic stability of the test
agent.  The specific procedures for conducting these ecological risk
assessments are not available.  However, identification, detection, and
fate analyses can be conducted by most microbial ecologists if appropriate
genetic tags and selective media are used to facilitate the detection of
the GMMP.
     Specific recommendations for recovering microbes from plant, insect,
and invertebrate tissues, from soil, and the use of appropriate buffers,
blending conditions, etc. are beyond the scope of this document.  Some of
these particulars will necessitate research and all will certainly require
trial and error efforts to optimize recovery.  -Nevertheless, flora and
                                   145

-------
fauna will  be analyzed qualitatively and quantitatively for the GMMP.
These analyses should be conducted until  two successive attempts to
recover the GMMP are negative.   If the GMMP is found in association with
nontarget specimens, the biological  nature of the association must be
determined.  Thus, histopathology and/or electron microscopy coupled with
suitable-means to locate and identify the GMMP must be conducted.  Evidence
should be provided so that it is obvious beyond any reasonable doubt that
the association of the GMMP with a nontarget species is transient and is
of no biological significance.
    Measurement of effects of GMMPs on other microbes, microbial processes,
and activities is a current topic of research now being supported by this
agency.  However, there are certain assays that can be conducted.to
assess ecological risks and EPA should consider these in evaluating risks
of new GMMPs.  The TSCM is designed so that fluid leachate from soil
cores can be collected.  Thus,  GMMP cell  densities and environmental fate
and survival including mobility through soil can be quantitatively measured
in these leachates. A basic investigation of the total microbial profile
in leachates collected from the experimental and control microcosms
should be made.  A total bacterial plate count should be reported as well
as estimates of numbers of different colony types appearing on a standard
medium.  A similar evaluation should be conducted for fungal populations.
These measurements can be used to evaluate impact of the GMMP on microbial
species diversity and population size.
     Various mineral analyses can also be conducted on the leachate.  Some
comparison of leachate chemical quality and quantity in the experimental
system must be made with.the negative control microcosm which did not
receive the GMMP.  Specific analyses of the leachate should involve
                                   146

-------
measurement  of the solution pH plus organic carbon,  total  carbon,  ammonia,

nitrate,  and inorganic phosphate.  Replication of analyses involving  leachates

from different soil  cores  is appropriate.


                                Bibliography


    Ausmus,  B. S., D. R. Jackson, and P. Van Voris.   1979.  The  accuracy
of screening techniques.  In:  J. M. Witt and J.  W.  Gillett,  eds.   Symposium
on Terrestrial Microcosms and Environmental Chemistry,  June,  1977,  Corvallis,
OR.  NSF/RA  79-0026.

    Beall, M. L., Jr., R. G. Nash, and P. C. Kearney.  1976.   Agroecosystem--a
laboratory model  ecosystem to simulate agricultural  field  conditions  for
monitoring pesticides.  In:  Environmental  Modeling  and Simulation, W.
Ott, ed.   EPA-600/9-76-016.  U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency,
Washington,  D. C.  pp. 790-793.

    Bezark,  L.G., and H. Yee.  1985.  Suppliers of beneficial  organisms.
Calif. Dept. Food and Ag.  Biological Control Services  Program.   Sacramento,
CA.  95832.   pp.  1-6.

    Cole, L. K.,  R. L. Metcalf, and J. R. Sanborn.  1976.   Environmental
fate of insecticides in a Jerrestnal model ecosystem.   Intern.  J.  Environ.
Studies.   10:7-14.

    Oraggan, S.  1976.  The microprobe analysis of 60-Cobalt uptake in  sand
microcosms.   Xenobiotica 6:557-563.

    Gile, J. D.,  J. C. Collins, and J. W. Gillett.  1982.   Fate  and impact
of wood preservatives in a terrestrial microcosm.  J. Agric. Food Chem.
30:295-301.

    Gile, J. D.  1983.  2,4-D--Its distribution and  effects in a ryegrass
ecosystem.  J. Environ. Qual.  12:406-412.

    Gillett, J. W., and J. D. Gile.  1976.   Pesticide fate in terrestrial
laboratory ecosystems.  Intern. Environ. Studies.  10:15-22.

    Gillett, J. W., J. M. Witt, and C. J. Watt (eds).  1979.  Symposium
on Terrestrial Microcosms and Environmental Chemistry.   June, 1977,
Corvallis, OR.  NSF/RA 79-0026.

    Lichtenstein, E. P., T. W. Fuhrmann, and K. R. Schulz.  1974.  Trans-
location  and metabolism of 14C-phorate as affected by percolating in  a
model soil-plant  ecosystem.  J. Agric. Food Chem.  22:991-996.

    Lichtenstein, E. P., K. R. Schultz, and R. R. Liang.  1977.   Fate of
fresh and aged soil  residues of the insecticide 14C-N-2596 in a  soil-corn-
water ecosystem.   J. Econ. Entomol.  70:169-175.
                                   147

-------
    Lighthart, B., H. Bond,  and B.  G.  Volk.   1977.   The use of soil/litter
microcosms with and without  added  pollutants  to study certain components
of the decomposer community.  In:   J.  M.  Witt and J.  W. Gillett,  eds.
Symposium on Terrestrial  Microcosms and  Environmental  Chemistry,  June,
1977, Corvallis, Or.  NSF/RA 79-0026.

    Metcalf, R. L., G. K. Sangha,  I. P.  Kapoor.  1971.   Model ecosystem for
the evaluation of pesticide  degradability and ecological  magnification.
Environ. Sci. Technol.  5:709-713.

    Tolle, D. A., M. A. Arthur, and P. Van Voris.  1983.   Microcosm/field
comparison of trace element  uptake  in  crops grown in  fly  ash-amended soil.
Sci. Total Environ. 31^242-261.

    Van Voris, P.  1985.   Standard  guide  for  terrestrial  soil-core microcosm.
ASTM Test Procedure.  Draft  for E47.08 subcommittee.

    Van Voris, P., D. A.  Tolle, and M. F.  Arthur.   1985.   Experimental
terrestrial  soil-core microcosm test protocol.   PB85-213338,  EPA/600/3-85/047.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Corvallis,  OR.  97333.

    Van Voris, P., D. A.  Tolle, M.  F. Arthur,  and J.  Chesson. 1985.
Terrestrial  microcosms:   applications, validations, and cost-benefit analysis.
In:  J. Cairns, Jr., (ed.).  Multispecies  toxicity  testing,  Pergamon Press,
New York,  pp 117-142.
                                  148

-------
                                APPENDIX A
    Included  in  Appendix A is a recommended list of beneficial  arthropods
for enclosed  systems testing.  Provided with this material  is information
for insect  propagation, life-cycle characteristics, a list  of suitable
prey/hosts, source materials and relevant literature citations.  Also
included is a copy of the pamphlet, "Suppliers of Beneficial  Organisms in
North America",  published by the State of California, Department of Food
and Agriculture.
    In the last section of the Appendix A is a copy of the Standard Guide
for Terrestrial  Soil-Core Microcosm, that was submitted to ASTM by Dr.
Van Voris.
                                   149

-------
                 Proposed  Non-Target Terrestrial Organisms for Testing Microbial Pest Control Agents (L«Ka Etzel)
rbhropod-Plant  Systems

 Predaceous Mites
 A* Acarina:Phytoseiidae
    (1) Amblyseiua hlbisci
        on Tetranychug urtioae
        (2-spotted mite)
        on lima bean plants
References Related to Rearing
Kennett & Hamai, 1960
     (2) Metaseiulus occidentalie  Ditto
        on T. urticae
        on lima bean plants

     (3) HiytoseiuluB persimilis   Ditto
        on T, urticae
        on lima bean plants
Sources for
Starting Colonies
CDFA listf
EntSoo list
                                    Ditto
                                    Ditto
Notes
A. hibiaci easily reared
on pollen (oak, magnolia,
& cattail pollens good)
 Insect Predators
 A. Heteroptera:Lygaeidae
    (4) Geocoria punctipes
        on noctuid-moth eggs
        on corn plants

 B. NeuropteratChrysopidae
    (5) Chrysoperla earnea
        (green laoewing)
        on Acyrthosiphon pisxim
        (pea aphid)
        on fava bean plants
        or alfalfa

  , Coleoptera:Coccinellidae
    (6) Hippodamia, convorgena
        on A_. pi gum
        on fava bean plants
        or alfalfa
Cohen, 1981
Cohen & Debolt, 1983
Morrison, 1985a (for £. earnea)
Forbes et al.,1985 (for aphids)
Hagen & Sluas, 1966 (for
  Hippodamia)
Forbes et al., 1985 (for aphida)
IhtSoo list)
Cohen (?)
CDPA listf
EntSoo list
CDFA list;
EntSoo list (for
  aphid)
Common in North America,
Can be reared on
artificial diet.

-------
 Arthropod~Plant Systems

       (7) Olla abdominalis
           on A_. pi sum
           on fava bean plants
           or alfalfa
       (8) Cryptolaemus montrouzieri Fisher, 196*3
           on Pseudococcidae
           (mealybugs) on citrus
           trees or oleanders
           or potato sprouts
References Related to Rearing
!II. Insect Parasites
    A. Hymenopterazlrichogrammatidae
       (9) Trichogramma spp.
           on Ostrinia nubilalis
           (Eur. corn borer) eggs
           or Heliothis zea (corn
           eorworm) eggs
           on corn plants

    B. Hymenoptera:!fymaridae
       (10) Anaphes flavipes
           on Oulema melanopua
           (cereal leaf beetle)
           eggs on cereal  grain
           plants

    C. gymenoptera:Aphidiidae
       (11) Aphidius ervi or smithi
           on A_. pi stan
           on fava bean plants
           or alfalfa

       (12) Maretiella rapae
           on Myzus  persioae
            (green peach aphid) or
           Brevicorynae brassioae
            (cabbage  aphidl
            on  Chinese cabbage
            or kale
Burbutis & Goldstein,
Morrison, 1985b
Anderson, 1968
UC-Berkeley (xinpubl.)
Forbes,  et  al.,1985  (for aphids)
 Simpson et al.,  1975
Sources Tor
Starting Colonies

Field collection;
EntSoc list (for
  aphid)
                                    CDFA list;
                                    EntSoc list
Motes

Common arboreal species
in North America.
Artificial diet soon to
be developed.
CDFA list;
EntSoc list
EntSoc list
EntSoo List
Field collection;
EntSoo list (for
  aphids)
Common parasite in
North America*
                                                                                                                           (V)

-------
Arthropod-Plant Systems

     (13) Lysiphlebua testaoeipes
          on SchizapMB graminum
          (greenbug) on oat plants

   D. HymenopterarBraconidae
     (14) Coteaia (»Apanteles)
          melanoacelus
          on Lymantria dispar
          (Gypsy Moth)

   E, Hymenoptera:Enoyrtidae
     (15) Metaphycus helvolus
          on Saissetia oleae
          (black scale)
          on oleander

   F. RymenopteratAphelinidae
     (16) Aphytis melinus
          Cor A. llagnanensia)
          on Aspidiotis nerii
          (oleander scale)
          on butternut pumpkins:
          (Cucurbita moschata)

   G. Iftnnienoptera:Chal(tididae
     (17) Braohymeria intermedia
          on Trichoplusia ni
          (cabbage loqper)
          on cabbage or other
          suitable plant

   H. DipterazTachinidae
     (18) Lixophaga diatraeae
          on Diatraea saccharalis
          (sugaroane borer)
          on plants (?)
References Related to Rearing

Starks & Burton, 1977
Sources for
Starting Colonies

CDFA listf
EntSoc list
Chianese, 1985 (for C. mglan^ftCelua) EntSoo list
ODell et alM 1995 (for    '"
PlanderB,
CDPA 'list
DeBach & White, 1960
Papacek & Smith, 1985
                                                    v
                                               fecale )
Palmer, 1985 (for B. intermedia)
King & Hariley, 1985a (for Gallaria
  mellonella)
Guy et alM 1985 (f^r T. ni)
King & Hartley. 1985>
  L. diatraeaej
 tog & Hartley, jt£05d
-------
  Arthropod-Plant Systems

III. Other Beneficial or Innocuous
       Insects
     A, HymenopterarApidae
       (19) Apis mellifera
            (honeybee) In cage
            with honey, water,
            and plants (alfalfa or
            mustard)

     B. LepidopterajNymphalidae
       (20) Vanessa cardui (painted
            lady butterfly) on
            host plants
Referenoea Related to Rearing
                                                                         Sourcee for
                                                                         Starting Colonies
                                                          Notes
Morton, 1979
Dietz, etal., 1976
                                    Apiary;
                                    Carolina Biol.  Supply
                                      Co.}
                                    Wards Natural Science
                                      Establishment,  Inc.
Carolina Biol. Supply
  Co.;
Wards Natural Science
  Establishment, Inc.
The most widely distri-
buted butterfly.  Hosts
include burdook, thistles,
sunflowers, nettles.  The
references listed are for
artificial diets given in
Singh (1985).

-------
                                                                                     -5-
                     Proposed Non-Target Terrestrial Organisms
                     for Testing Microbial Pest Control Agents (L.K. Etzel)

 I.  General References

     1.  Bezark, L.G. and H. Yee
           1985,  1985 Suppliers of Beneficial Organisms in North America.  California
                  Department of Food, and Agriculture, Biological Control Services
                  Program, 3288 Meadowview Road, Sacramento, CA 95832.   6 pp.

     2.  Dickerson, V.A., J.B. Hoffman, E.G. King, N.C. Leppla, and T.M. OBell
           1979.  Arthropod Species in Culture in the United States and Other
                  Countries.  Entomological Society of America, College Park, MD.  93 pp.

     3.  Singh, P. and H.F. Moore (eds.)
         '  1985.  Handbook of Insect Rearing.  Volumes I and II.  Elsevier, New
                  York.  488 pp. & 514 PP.

II.  Specific References

     4*  Anderson, B.C.
           1968.  The biology and ecology of Anaphes flavipes. an exotic egg parasite
                  of the cereal leaf beetle.  Ph.D. Thesis.  Purdue University, 148 pp,

     5.  Burbutis, P.P. and L.F. Goldstein
           1983.  Mass rearing Trichogramma nubilale on European corn borer, its
                  natural host.  Protection Ecology, 5_s269-275«

     6.  Chianese, R.
           1985.  Cotesia melanoscelus.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
                  and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 395-400, Elsevier, New York,
                  488 pp.

     7.  Cohen, A.C.
           1981.  An artificial diet for Geoooris -punctrpes (Say),  Southwest.
                  Entomol., £:109-113.

     8.  Cohen, A.C. and J.V. Debolt
           1983.  Rearing Geocoris punctipes on insect eggs.  Southwest. Entomol.,
                  8_:6l-64.

     9.  DeBach, P. and E.B. White
           1960.  Commercial mass culture of the California red scale parasite
                  Aphytis lingnanensis.  Calif. Agric. Exp. Stn. Bull. No. 770, 58 PP.

    10.  Deitz, L.L., J.W. Van Duyn, J.R. Bradley, Jr., R.L. Rabb, V.M. Brooks,
           and R.E. Stizmer
           1976.  A guide to the identification and biology of soybean arthropods in
                  North Carolina.  Agric. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 238, 264 pp.

    11.  Fisher, T.V.
           1963.  Mass culture of Cryptolaemus and Leptomastix. natural enemies of
                  citrus mealybug.  Calif. Agr. Expt. Stn. Bull., 797:39.

-------
                                                                                 -6-
12.  Flanders, S.E.
       1942.  Metaphycna helvolus, an encyrtid parasite of the black scale.
              Jour. Econ. Entomol., ^5.: 690-698.
13.  Forbes, A.R., B.D. Frazer, and O.K. Chan
       1985.  Aphids.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh and R.F. Moore,
              eds.), Vol. I, pp. 355-359.  ELsevier, New York, 488 pp.

14.  Guy, R.H., N.C. Leppla, and J.R. Rye
       1985.  Trichoplusia pj.  in "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. qingh and
              H.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 487-494.  ELsevier, New Tork,  514 pp.

15.  Eagen, K.S. and R.R. Sluss
       1966.  Quantity 'of aphids required for reproduction by HiTypodanii*. spp. in
              tHa laboratory.  Pp. 47-59.  In "Ecology of Aphidophagoua Insects"
              (I. Hodek, ed.), Dr. W. Junkr Publ., The Hague, Netherlands, 360. pp.

16.  Kennett, C.E. and J. Hamal
       1980,  Oviposition and development in_predaceous mites fed with artificial
              and natural diets (Acari:Phytoseiidae).  Ent. Erp. Appl., 28;116-
              122.

17*  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985a.  Galleria mellonella.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P.Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 301-305, Elsevier, Bew York,
              514 PP.

18.  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985b.  Libcophaga diatraeae.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 119-123, Elsevier, New York,
              514 PP.

19.  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985c.  Diatraea saccharalis.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 265-270, Elsevier, Bew York,
              514 PP.

20.  Morrison, R.K.
       1985a.  Chrysopa carnea.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh and
              R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 419-426, Elsevier, New York, 488 pp.

21.  Morrison, ~R.K.
       1985b.  !Prichograwia spp.  In' "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 413-417» Elsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

22.  Morton, A.C.
       1979.  Rearing butterflies on artificial diets.  J. Res. Lepid., 18_:221-
              227.

23.  ODell, T.M., C.A. Butt, and A.W. Bridgeforth
       1985.  Lymantria diapar.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh and
              R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 355-367, Elsevier, New York, 514 PP.

-------
                                                                                -7-
24.  Palmer, D.J.
       1985.  Brachymeria intermedia.  In "Handbook of  Insect Hearing"  (p. Singh
              and H.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 383-393,  ELsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

25.  Papacek, D.F. and D. Smith
       1985.  Aphytis lingnanensis.  In "Handbook of Insect Hearing" (p. Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 373-381,  ELsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

26.  Simpson, B.A., V.A. Shands, and G.V. Simpson
       1973.  Mass rearing of the parasites Praon sp. and  Diaretiella ra-pae.
              Aon. Qrfcomol. Soc. Am., 68:257-260.

27.  Singh, P.
       19&5.  Multiple-species rearing diets.  In "Handbook of Insect Hearing"
              (P. Singh & H.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 19-44,  ELsevier, New
              York, 488 pp.

28.  Starks, K.J. and R.L. Burton
       1977.  Greeribugs: determining bib-types.  TISDA-ARS Tech. Bull., 1556:12.

-------
                                        State of California
                               Department of Food and Agriculture
                                           1985
               SUPPLIERS OF BENEFICIAL ORGANISMS
                                    IN NORTH AMERICA
                                        Larry G. Bezark
                                            Helen Yee
                               Biological Control Services Program
            Division of Pest Management Environmental Protection and Worker Safety
                               "A beneficial mite attacking a pest mite"
                                          Artwork by Linda Heith

Insects, mites, snails and diseases, although usually thought of as undesirable, can be very useful for controlling various
pests. Biological control Is the use of beneficial organisms for pest control These beneficial organisms can be predators
such as ladybugs. lacewings and praying mantlds. which feed on other Insects. Others, such as nematodes and wasps
Including Trichogramma, are parasites. Trtchogramma. wasps lay their eggs In the eggs of caterpillar pests, where they
develop by feeding on the pest's egg. Some beneficial Insects attack noxious weeds. Fungi, bacteria and viruses can also
be used to control Insect and weed pests.
"Hie 1982 version of this list has been sent in response to thousands of requests, to Individuals, universities, extension
entomologists, and many others. The list has appeared In part or In Its entirety. In several magazines and has been
walled out separately as part of a larger publication on resources for organic pest control. Since this list was last
published three years ago. we have added 23 new suppliers. In addition, there are 13 organisms now available that were
not for sale In 1982.

-------
Green OU»er
Lace- Lady- Praying Egg Organisms
Wings Bugs Mantids Wasps (see last page)
CGP
CWP.PMP
Supplier
Ag Bio Chem Inc.
3 Fleetwood Ct
Orlnda, CA 94563
(415) 254-O789
Applied Bionomics
P.O. Box 2637
Sidney. B.C
Canada V8L4C1
(6O4) 656-2123
Mail Phone Whole-
Order Order Retail sale No
XX x Free
Brochu
X X X X Free
Catalog
Need
Permit
For US
Import
     MD.RSM
Associates Insectary
P.O. Box 969
Santa Paula, CA 93060
(805) 933-1301
FPG. FPS
1*2. MB


FPM. FPN
FPS. GHP


Beneficial Bloaystetn*
1603-P 63rd Street
Emeryville. CA 94608
(415)655-3928
Beneficial Insectary
245 Oak Run Road
Oak Rua CA 96O69
(916)472-3715
XXX Whole-
sale
For
PCA's
X X X X Postage
Paid


                        Beneficial Insects
                        Company
                        P.O. Box 556
                        Brownsville. CA 95919
                        (916) 675-2251
                                               X      X   Free
                                                           Brochun
X   FP
Beneficial Insects Ltd.
P.O. Box 154
Banta, CA 95304
                             Ltcewlng-
                             April-Ju]]
     APA, GWP
     PMM. PMP
Better Yield Insects
13310 Riverside Drive E.
Tecumseh. Ontario
Canada N8N 1B2
(519h 735-OO02
X      X      X      X   Need pen
                             For US
                             Import
DS
Bio-Con Systems
P.O. Box 377
Sunnymead. CA 92388
(714) 656-1712
X X X X Free
Brochure
X .X X X FP Bio-Control Company
P.O. Box 247
Cedar Ridge. CA 95924
(916) 272-1997 *
X X X X Free
Brochure
     PMA
                        Biogenesis. Inc.
                        P.O. Box 36
                        Mathls. TX 78368
                        (512) 547-3259
                               X      X       X       X
XX X .BSP. FPM. FPS
GHP. GWP. LT. MD
NPV. PMC. PMO
PMP. RSM
PMC. PML
PMO. PMP
Bio Insect Control X X X X
710 5. Columbia
Plalnvlew. TX 79072
(806) 293-5861"
Blotactlcs. Inc. X X X X Free
7765 Lakeside Drive Brochure
Riverside. CA 92509
(714) 685-7681 after 6 pm

-------
jiten
|IBC. Lady- Praying Egg Other
«gM Bugs Mantids Wasps Organisms Supplier
PN. PNB B.R. Supply Company
PNC PNC £.O. Box 845
Exeter. CA 93221
(2O9) 732-3422
BP Burgess Seed & Plant Co. .
Department 69
905 Four Seasons Road
Bloomlngton. IL 61701
(309) 663-9551
XXX Burpee Seed Company
3OO Park Avenue
Warmlnster. PA 18974
v X FP.NOW California Green Lacewlngs
NOWP P.O. Box 2495
Merced. CA 95340
(209) 722-4985
X CHP. PNC Colorado Insectary
P.O. Box 3266
Durango. CO 81302 -
(3O3) 247-536O
DS Decollate Snails
P.O. Box 972
. Lake Arrowhead. CA 92352
(714) 337-2282 after 7 pm
BP Fairfax Biological
Laboratories. Inc.
Clinton Comers. NY 12514
(914) 266-3705
• BP. GHP Fanners Seed and Nursery
MB Department 72
22O7 East Oakland Avenue
Bloomlngton. IL 61701
(309) 663-9551
DS Flllmore Decollate
Snail Farm
Mail Phone Whole-
Order Order Retail sale Notes
X X X X
XXX Free
Catalog
X Free
Catalog
X X X X Free
Literature
& Price
List
X X X X Free
Brochure
X X X X Free
Brochure
SendSASE
X X X X Free
Brochure
XXX Free
Catalog
X X X X Free
Brochure
                                2841 West Young Road
                                FUlmoreCA 93015
                                (805) 524-103O
                                (714) 781-7643
        X    BSP. DS. FP
             MO.RSM
Foothill Ag. Research Inc.
510W. Chase Drive
Corona. CAS 1720
(714)371-0120
X    Free
     Literature
                                Fountain's Sierra Bug Co.
                                P.O.Box 114
                                Rough & Ready. CA 95975
                                (916) 273-0513
                                                       X   Free
                                                           Brochure
                                Cothard Inc.
                                P.O. Box 7
                                Mesllla. NM 88046
                                (505) 522-9031
                                                       X   Free
                                                           Brochure
X       X    FP. CHP
Curney Seed & Nursery Co.
Yankton. SD 57079
(605)665-4451
     Free
     Catalog

-------
Green
Lace-
Wings
X
X
X
X
X
X
X



X
X
X
Lady Praying Egg Other
Bugs Mantids Wasps Organisms
X X D&FPMJPP
FPRFPS.GHP
GWP.MRMD.NPV
PMCJ»MUPMO
PMP.RSB.RSM
X X X BP.FP
GHP. MB
X X BSP.CMDJDS
FPM.FPS.FPT
GHP.GWP.MD.PMC
PMO.PMP.RSM
X X X BP.FP
GWP.MD
PM
X X FP.FPS
PMA
XX FP
XXX. BP. FPS.FPZ
GHP. GWP. MCP
MO
BP
DS
X
XXX BSP. FPM. FPN
FPS.GWP. MB
MD. MF. PBP.
PMC. PML. PMO
PMP. RSM
X GWP.MD
. PMC. PML
PMO. PMP
X X BBP. BP. CPP
FP. GHP. GWP. MB
MD. NPV. PMC
PMO. PMP. PNC
Supplier
Harmony Farm Supply
P.O. Box 451
Graton. CA 95444
(707) 823-9123
Henry Field's Seed
and Nursery Company
Shenandoah. IA 51602
(712) 246-1888
Integrated Pest Management
305 Agostino Road
San Gabriel CA 91776
(818)287-1101
King's Natural Pest Control
224 Yost Avenue
Spring City. PA 19475
Kunafin Trichogramma
Insectaries
Route 1. P.O. Box 39
Quemado. TX 78877
(512) 757-1468
(512) 773-0149
Lakeland Nurseries Sales
Inc. 340 Poplar Street
Hanover. PA 17331
(717) 637-5555
Mellinger's Nursery
2310 W. South Range Road
North Lima. OH 44452
(216) 549-9861
Miller Nurseries
5060 West Lake Road
Canandalgua. NY 14424
Chuck Musgrove
Riverside. CA
(714) 78O-8733
Nationwide Seed & Supply
4801 Fengenbush Lane
Louisville. KY 40228
Natural Pest 'Controls
8864 Little Creek Drive
Orangevale. CA 95662
(916) 726-0855
Nature's Control
P.O. Box 35
Medford. OR 97501
(503) 773-5927
Necessary Trading Company
P.O. Box 603
New Castle. VA 24127
(703) 864-5103
Mall Phone Whole
Order Order Retail sale Notes
X XX X Free
Catalog
XXX Free
Catalog
J( JW A Jt £rQ1llf
Literature
X XX Postpaid
Free
Literature
X X X X Free
Information
XXX Free
Catalog
XXX Free
Catalog
X X Free
Catalog
X X Wffl not
Ship
X Postage
Paid
X X X Free
Brochure
X X X X Free
Brochure
X X X X Charge for
Catalog
PN
                   The Nematode Farm. Inc.
                   3335 Birch Street
                   PaJo Alto. CA 94306
                   (415)494-8630

-------
^*^ lady- Praying Egg Other
jl^l Bugs Mantids Wasps Organisms
X X'
x X X BSP. FP. GWP
MB. MD. PMC.
PML. PMO. PMP
RSM
BP
DS
X X X X BPBSP.DSJPM
FPS.GHP.GWP.MD
MF.NOW.NPV.PMC
PMHJMUPMO.PMP
PN.PNCRSBJISM
BP. GHP. MB
XX X X APA-Canada only
FP-US only
GWP-Canada only
PMP-Canada only
XX X BSP.DS. FP
GWP. MD. PMC
PMO. PMP
BBP
X FPG. FPM. FPS
GWP. MD
x X X X FP.GWP
X X
PMO
Supplier
Organic Control Inc.
5 132 Venice Blvd.
Los Angeles. CA 90019
Organic Pest Control
Naturally
P.O. Box 55267
Seattle. WA 98 1 55
(206) 367-0707
Richard Owen Nursery
Department 74
2300 East Lincoln Street
Bloomlngton. IL 61701
(309) 663-9551
Pacific Tree Farms
4301 Lynwood Drive
Chula Vista. CA 92O1O
(619) 422-2400
Peaceful Valley Farm Supply
1 1 1 73 Peaceful Valley'Road
Nevada City. CA 95959
(916) 265-3276
Reuter Laboratories
P.O. Box 346
Haymarket VA 22069
1-800-368-2244
Rich ten
P.O. Box 26
Goodwood. Ontario
Canada LOC 1AO
(416)640-6677
Rlncon-VUova
Insectartes. Inc.
P.O. Box 95
Oak View. CA 93O22
(805) 643^5407'
• Rocky Mountain Inacctary
P.O. Box 152
Palisade. CO 81526
(303)245-0406^
Spaldlng Laboratories
76O Prtntz Road
Arroyo Grande. CA 93420
(605) 489-5946
Unique Insect Control
P.O. Box 15376
Sacramento. CA 95851
(916) 967-7082
West Coast Ladybug Sales
P.O. Box 903
Grldley. CA 95948
(916) 534-0840
Wllk. Kltayama and Mead
9093 Troxel Road
Chico. CA 95928
Mall Phone Whole
Order Order Retail sale Notes
X X X Free
Catalog
Postpaid
X XX Charge for
Catalog
XXX Free
Catalog
X X X X Charge for
Catalog
X X X X Free
Catalog
X X X X Free
Brochure
XXX Canada
Orders
Only In June
Need permit
For US
Import
X X X X Free
Brochure
Visa and MC
X X X X Free
Brochure
X X X X Free
Brochure
X X X X Free
Literature
X X X X Free
Literature
XXX Sulfur & OP
Resistant
Strain

-------
California Department of Food and Agriculture
Biological Control Services Program
3288 Meadowview Road
Sacramento. CA 95832
                                                                          . POSTAGE
X>00 AND AGRICULTURE
      1220 M  STREET
  SACRAVEN7O. CA 95314
            OREHI lAaCWINGS-Qvyjopo. canxa
            LADTBUCA-Hlppodamto canurrgnu
            PKATINO MAirnD*-r
            BOO WAftPV-rnrnaonimnia mlniuum
                       TntlKUjrumma platntrt
            APA-AphM paruile->lphhio/r«f* aphldtmyza
            BBP-Bean beetle p*z*tUr-PtdtobiiaJbvtotatu3
            BP-MIIky ipocr-BortUua popiltlae
            CCT-Crown gill pmrntlvc-^gnitaetcrfum rodloboct«-
            CtCD-Cllrus mcah-bug p*n*lir-L«p(oniasiu daclylopll
            CPf-Colondo potato beetle panuile-E^ivum putllert
            OS-DrmlUte MUil-ffumliM dcrallala
            TMTjr pumte* variola iprcte*
                CPH-Crmuhoppcr pathogavNa
                GWFM5reenhou>e whltefly pum&if
                LT-Cnenbu( puwiie-Ly«(p/i/ebta fntarrtpo
                MB-Mo«qulio bacterlum-Bacll/u* l/iurtngtafutt (iractKnK*
                MCF-Mormon cricket pathogen
                afD-M«Jybug de*trayer-Oyp trutd
                PMC-Predaiory mHe-Amblyselia calljornlcut
                PMH-Pred*toiy mlle-Ambfyscluj ftHMid
                na^Prrdatory mlir-PfiyluetuJu* lonptpe*
                PMM-Predxoiy mlir-Amb/ysMuc mcknuKt
                PMO-Predalory mlie-M««a«rtu(u» occldcniaJU
            rm-Fty pumsllv-Moionia cttrtptnnte
            Fm-Tly parMtte-Carrtnaox sp.
            FFHTJr pcnsllr-Spalanola «iH«ia
            rTT-riy puulir-SpfitiDfoawrr lachfnarpfiagus imlaiulana earpocoptar
                PNO-Panslllc ntnuitoac-Neoapleaana ata«rrt
                MSB-Red sole panaue-Gomprrtrlla btfdmclata
                MSM-Red icmle para>lte-Xpfi|/ll« nw/lnu*
            The oinplUar kuval bacterium Baettlu* thuHngtmtU to (valliblr through many reuU
            and wholoate concern* under wioua brand names.
 Inclusion in this pamphlet does not imply an endorsement of the suppliers or their products by the California Department of
 Food and Agriculture, nor does it imply criticism of other suppliers not listed. This pamphlet may be freely reproduced. One
 copy per request is available from:
                                          Biological Control Services Program
                                                  3288 Meadowview Road
                                                  Sacramento. CA 95832
                                                       (916) 427-4590

-------
                                                                   Draft No. 2
                                                                   May 17,  1985
                                                                   Peter Van Voris
                                                                   509/375-2498
                  Designation: EXXXX-85
                       AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
                         1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA  19103

  Standard Guide for

  TERRESTRIAL SOIL-CORE  MICROCOSM

  This standard 1s  Issued  under the fixed designation  EXXX;  the nunber  Imedlately  following
  the designation  Indicates  the year  of original adoption  or, In the case of revision,  the
  year of the  last revision.  A  nunber  In parentheses Indicates the year of last  approval.
  This guide Is under  the  Jurisdiction of ASTM  Committee  E*7  on  Biological Effects  and
  Environmental  Fate,  and  Is the direct responsibility .of  Subcommittee E47.08 on Biological
  Field Tests.
  1.0  SCOPE
       1.1   This standard guide defines the requirements and  procedures for
  testing  the  environmental   fate,   ecological  effects  and   environmental
  transport  of  chemicals  1n  terrestrial   ecosystems  using  the  soil -core
  microcosm.   Additionally, 1t provides a general  rationale  for the approach
  and materials suggested  for use in the soil -core microcosm.
       1.2   This  test  procedure  is  designed  to  supply  site-specific  or
  possibly  regionalized   information  on  the  probable  chemical  fate  and
  ecological  effects  resulting fron release or spills of  chemicals  in the
  environment in either  liquid or solid form.
       1.3   Experience  has shown that microcosms  are best  applied chemical
  in   the  assessment  process  at  stages  after  aquisltion  of  preliminary
  knowledge about a chemical's properties and  biological activity.   The data
  resulting from  performance  of this  standard can then  be  used to  compare
  the  potential terrestrial  environmental hazards  of a chemical.
'M» document l'i  In process of development and Is for ASTM committee use only.  It sh«ll not
be reproduced or  circulated or quoted, In whole or 1n part, outside of ASTM coonittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with Jurisdiction  or
the President of  the Society.

-------
       1.4   This  standard guide may involve hazardous materials, chemicalst
 radiolabeled compounds,  hazardous operations  and wastes.   This standard
 guide  does not  purport to address  all of the  safety problems associated
 with  testing the environmental  toxicity and environmental  fate of a  pure
 chemical  or complex mixture  of chemicals.  It is  the  responsibility  of
 whoever uses this  standard to consult and establish the appropriate safety
 and . health  protocols  and  determine  the  applicability  of  regulatory
 limitations  for  wastes prior to performing the test.

 2.   APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
      2.1   ASTM Standards:
            D18 Test Methods for Soils and Rocks
                (D422-63, D2167-84, D2216-80, and D2488-84)
            D19 Test Methods for Water Quality Analysis
                (0511-84, D515-82, D1254-67, D1426-79,.and D3867-79)
      2.2   Environmental Protection Agency 1982.  Environmental  Effects
            Test Guideline. Washington, DC.  Office of Pesticides and Toxic
            Substances,  U.  S. EPA EPA 560/6-82-002.  Available from NTIS,
            Springfield, VA PB82-232992.
      2.3   Environmental Protection Agency. 1982.  Environmental Effects
            Test Guideline.  Washington, DC.  Office of Pesticides and Toxic
            Substances,  U.S. EPA  EPA 560/6-82-002.  Available from NTIS,
            Springfield, VA PB82-232992.
      2.4   Environmental Protection Agency. 1982.  Chemical  Fate Test
            Guideline.  Washington, DC.  Office of Pesticides and Toxic
            Substances,  U.S. EPA  EPA 560/6-82-003.  Available from NTIS,
            Springfield, VA PB82-233008.
 3.0  DEFINITION OF TERMS
      3.1  Soil-Core Terrestrial Microcosm - The  terrestrial  microcosm  or
 micro-ecosystem is  defined here  as  a  physical  model  of  an Interacting
,^-^r—
This tfocu»ent it In process of development and is for ASTH committee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or In part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with Jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  cormunity of autotrophs, omm'vores, herbivores, carnivores and decomposers
  within  an intact  soil  profile.   Specifically, it  is  an intact soil-core
  containing the  natural  assemblages  of  biota  surrounded by  the boundary
  material.     The   system    includes    all    equipment,   facilities,   and
  instrumentation   necessary  to   maintain,  monitor,   and   control   the
  environment.   The  forcing  functions,  e.g.,  light  intensity  and duration,
  water quality and watering  regime, temperature,  and toxicant dose for the
  test  system, are  under  the  investigator's control.  This test  system  is
  distinguished from test  tube and single  species toxicity tests by having a
  natural  assemblage of organisms present,  resulting 1n a higher order  of
  ecological complexity and, thus, the capacity to evaluate chemical effects
  on  component interactions  and  ecological  processes.   Certain features  of
  this test  system however,  set limits oi\. the types of questions that can  be
  legitimately  addressed.    Those .limitations  are   related  to   scale  and
  sampling,  which  in turn  constrain both (a) the  type of ecosystems  and
  species  assemblages on which one can hope to gain information, and (b) the
  longevity  of  the test system.          .,_
      3.2  Physical, Chemical and  S-iolog€sal Conditions  -  The  physical,
  chemical,  and biological conditions-jof  the  test system  are  determined  by
                                       '§&.•:
  the  type of  ecosystem from which th% test system  was  extracted  and  by
  either  the natural vegetation  in the^ecosystem or  the selection of crops
  for  planting.    Vegetation  and  cr^s  selection   are   constrained  and
  determined by the  size  (width and depth) of the soil core extracted.
      Boundaries  -  The boundaries of the  test system are  determined by the
  size of  the core and  the growth space needed for the vegetative component.
      Light  - Light for  the test-^iystem  can  be  supplied  by  artificial
  lighting  in  either a growth chamber^"fir-greenhouse or can be the natural
  photoperiod occurring in a greenhouse.  Because of  the  flexability of this
  test guide,   lighting  period is not  specified;  however, if  the  test  is
  performed  in  a  growth chamber, the daily  photoperiod  should be at least
  the  average   monthly  incident  radiation (quantity  and duration)  for the
  month  in  which the  test   is  being  performed.    During extremely  short
	                          -3-
This document irs 
-------
  natural  photoperiods, which might not allow for  l=flowering or seed set to
  occur,  the photoperiod should  be  artificially lengthened.   If  the  test is
  performed  in a  growth chamber, the  daily photoperiod  should be at  least
  the  average monthly incident  radiation  (quantity  and  duration)  for  the
  month in which  the test is being performed.
      Water  -   Water  for  the   test   system    should   either  be purified
  untreated  laboratory water with a  known chemical composition or should be
  precollected,  filtered rainwater from the site being evaluated.  ASTM  D19
  Test Methods for Water Quality Analysis should be followed.
      Soil  - The  soil  for the  microcosm should  be  an Intact,  undisturbed
  (non-homogenized) core extracted from a soil  type typical of the region or
  site of  interest and be of sufficient depth to allow  a full  growing  season
  for  the natural  vegetation  or the  crops selected,  without causing  the
  plants to  become significantly  rootbound. Disturbances during  extraction
  and preparation should be kept to  a minimum.    It should  be  noted that soil
  characteristics will play an important  role  in how the  microcosm responds
  to  a  test  substance.   In addition,  within-site soil  heterogeneity will
  also  influence  the  microcosm  response*  The  approach   used  in this test
  system  however,  is  based  on  comparison  of  responses   among and  between
  treatments  rather than on tte  atejolitfte values measured  for  an  individual
  microcosm.
      Biota  - The biota  of the microcosm are characterized by  the organisms
  in  the  soil at  the  time  of extraction  (Parkinson  et  al. 1971;  Phillipson
  1971) and  by the natural  vegetation or crops  introduced  as  the  autotrophic
  component.    The  biota   includes   all  heterotrophic   and   carnivorous
  invertebrates  in  the  soi3 antf all  soil  and  plant  bacj^J^^ungi,  and
  viruses.

  4.0  SIGNIFICANCE AND  USES

      4.1       This  test  method establishes a4procedure  to  assist industry
  in evaluating the potential  ecological impacts and environmental transport
	                          -4-
This document 1* in process of development and 1s for ASTM ccwnittee use only.   It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, In whole or 1n part, outside of ASTM conwittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with Jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  of a chemical  that may  be  released or  spilled  in  the environment.   The
  suggested test procedures are designed to supply  site  specific  information
  for a chemical without having to perform field  test.
       4.2       Specifically, this test is used  to determine  the effect  of a
  chemical on;  (1)  growth  and reproduction of  either natural vegetation or
  crops,  and  (2)  nutrient  uptake and cycling within  the soil/plant system.
  Additionally, the  soil-core microcosm will  provide  Information  on;  (1)
  potential for bioaccumulation (i.e., enrichment)  of the chemical into plant
  issues,  and  (2)  the  potential  for  and rate of transport  of the chemical
  through  soil to ground water.
       4.3       The results of this test should  be used 1n  conjunction with
  information on  the chemical and  biological  activity  of  the  chemical  of
  interest to compare the relative environmental  hazard  and  the potential for
  environmental  movement once released.
       4.4       The test  methods  described here are  designed specifically
  for liquid  or  solid  type  materials.   Significant  modifications  of  the
  exposure system  would  be necessary to accommodate chemicals  that  may be
  released in a gaseous  or aerosol  form.
       4.5       Correlation of multi-year  soil-core  microcosm test results
  with  data derived  from a series of multi-year field  plot tests  has been
  determined  for  a limited  number  of materials.  Information  relating  to
  microcosm to field correlation  can be  found  in Van  Voris et aj_.  (1984),
  Van  Voris et al_.  (1985) and Tolle et.af. (1983)
                                  t   "  •'
  5.0   CHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION  OF  TEST SUBSTANCE AND SOIL

       5.1.1      Infcmation   Fequired   or.  lest   Substance   -   Minimum
  information required  to  properly  design  and  conduct  an  experiment on a
  test  chemical  includes  the  chemical's   source,   composition,  degree  of
  purity,   nature   and  quantity  of   any impurities   present, and  certain
  physiochemical  information such as water  solubility and vapor pressure at
This document is in process of development and \\ for ASTM comnittee use only.   It shall  net
6«  reproduced or circulated or quoted, in »hole or in part, outside of ASTM cotmitte*
activities except wfth the approval  of the chairman of ttie committee with Jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  25°C (Laskowski £t a_K  1982; Swann  et  jil_.  1983).  Ideally, the  structure
  of the test  chemical  should  also be known,  including functional  groups,
  nature and  position  of  substituting  groups,  and degree  of  saturation.
  Octanol-water  partition  coefficient,   dissociation  constant,  degree  of
  polarity,  and pH of both pure and a series of serial dilutions shall  also
  be known.   Where  mixtures  are involved  or where  a  significant  impurity
  (>1%)  occurs, data must be  available on as many components as practicable.
  However, the  octanol-water partition coefficient  (Kow or P) stands out  as
  the  key value.   In'combination  with other  chemical  characteristics, log
  can  be used  to  estimate  Henry's  Law Constant to  predict volatility  from
  soil  solutions.  Soil   sorption  can  be  estimated  from  log,  the  organic
  matter content, or from those data that suggest  a  relationship  exists.
  Water  solubility  can  be  predicted  with some degree  of  accuracy from log
  if this value is less  than  7.
      5.1.2      Several  tests  may  be   needed  to  supply information  on
  environmental    mobility    and    stability.     Support   information    on
  phytotoxicity,  the physicochemical  nature of the  chemical,  its mammalian
  toxicity,   invertebrate  toxicity  or   its  ecological   effects  (e.g.,
  species-specific LD5Q, biodegradability)  not  only assist in proper design
  of the microcosm experiment, but also are useful in assessing the fate and
  effects of the  chemical  in  a  terrestrial microcosm.  If  the  chemical  is
  radioactively labeled, the position and specific  element to  be  labeled
  should be  specified.
      5.1.3      It   is   imperative   to   have  an  estimate   of   the   test
  substance's  toxicity  to  mammals  as  a   precaution  for worker  safety.   In
  addition,  hydrolysis or photolysis rate constants should be known in  order
  to determine  necessary handling precautions.  When a radiolabeled material
  is used,   normal  laboratory  techniques  for  radiation  safety  provide  an
  ample  margin  of  safety (Wang and Willis 1965), except for chemicals in the
  "very  highly  toxic" category (i.e., rat oral LD5Q <1 mg/kg).
      5.1.4     The above  information required for a test chemical is  con-
  sidered  to be   the minimum  that  is  necessary  to handle  and apply the
                                      -6-
This document  is in process of devel opfl>ent and is for ASTM cotmiittee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced  or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM conwittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
  chemical  safely  (Walters  1980),  as  well  as  provide a  perspective from
  which  to  interpret the test  results.   Water solubility,  soil sorption and
  octanol-water partitioning,  and vapor  pressure  largely will  control the
  physical  transport and bioavailability  of  a test chemical  in soil.   Water
  soluble chemicals are likely to move  with  soil  water into the water  films
  surrounding  soil  particles  and root  surfaces.   Most microbially-mediated
  biodegradation  occurs   in  the   water-containing  microsites   of  soil
  particles.   Plant  uptake  and  bioaccumulation  is  largely  a  function  of
  water  transfer  to roots  and solubility in  fatty  tissues.   In  addition,
  water-soluble  chemicals  and  their transformation  products may  be leached
  to ground water.   Water solubility of an organic chemical is a function of
  the  dissociation  of  ionic  compounds  and  the  polarity  of  non-ionic
  compounds.
      5.2.1      Information Required on  Soil- Soil  sorption  of  an organic
  molecule  depends on  several  properties  of the chemical  (i.e.,  molecular
  size,  ionic  speciation,  acid-base  properties,  polarity,  and nature  of
  functional  groups) and  of the  soil  (e.g.,  organic matter  content, clay
  content,  clay  mineralogy and  nature,  pH,  water content, bulk  density).
  Highly sorbed  chemicals  may displace inorganic nutrient ions from exchange
  sites  in  the  soil  and also  may be effectively  immobilized,  depending on
  soil pH.  Thus,  chemicals attracted more strongly to soil surfaces than to
  water  may  be  very  immobile in  soil.   In some cases, this may  render the
  compound relatively resistant to biodegradation.   In other cases, however,
  immobilization of the compound  on soil particles may render it susceptible
  to   extracellular   enzymatic   degradation.   Specific   information  on
  descriptive  data  required for soil  can be found in Section 6.2.2.
      5.2.2      Compounds  with  very  high vapor  pressures  (boiling   point
  <80°C  or  vapor  pressure  >25 mm  Hg-) are not  suitable for testing  in the
  terrestrial  soil  core microcosm as  described  here.  Modification  of the
  test  system  such  as  that  described  in  Van Voris  et al.  (1977)  and Van
  Voris .et £K  (1981) should be useful  for handling  gaseous  or aerosol type
  chemicals.
_     	r                          -7-
This document  is in process of development and  is for ASTM committee use only.  It  shall not
be reproduced  or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM cowr ttee
activities except with the approval of the chaiman of the cormittee with ju'i sdi ction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
  6.0  TERRESTRIAL  MICROCOSM EXTRACTION AND  MAINTENANCE
       6.1  Microcosm and  Cart  Design  -  The  60-cm-deep by  17-cm-dlameter
  terrestrial microcosm is  designed to  yield pertinent  information about a
  chemical  for  either  a  natural  grassland  ecosystem   (Figure   1)  or an
  agricultural ecosystem planted  with  a multiple-species  crop (Van Voris et
  aj_.  1982, 1984,  1985;  Zwick ert  aj_.  1984).  The  agricultural  microcosm  is a
  17-cm-diameter  tube of Driscopipe* containing an  intact subsoil  core (40
  cm)  covered by  homogenized topsoil  (20 cm).   Driscopipe  is an  ultra-high
  molecular weight,  high-density, non-plasticized polyethylene pipe.
                  Driscopipe^
                  High Density
                  Polyethylene
                  Glass Wool
                  Bi.'Chner Funnel
Intact
Soil Core
                  Figure  1.   Microcosm Structure and Materials
                              (After Van Voris  et_ al_. 1985)

                                       -8-
This document is  in process of development and is for ASTM cw«ittee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced or  circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the co*«ittee with jurisdiction or
the President of  ^e Society.

-------
 non-plasticized   polyethylene   pipe.     It   is   impermeable   to   water,
 lightweight,  tough,  rigid,  and  highly  resistant  to  acids,  bases,  and
 biological   degradation.    Additionally,  Driscopipe*  does  not   release
 plasticizers or other compounds that may interface  with test results.  The
 tube  sits on a Buchner funnel  covered by a  thin  layer of glass wool.   The
 funnel  and  tube are washed  with 0.1  HC1  prior to  use and are reuseable  for
 future  tests.
       6.1.2      Six microcosms are  typically contained  in a moveable  cart,
 which   is  packed   with  Styrofoam*  beads  to   reduce   drastic   changes   in
 temperature  profile  (Van  Voris  e± aK  1982,  1984;)  (Figure  2)., Cart
 dimensions   are   based   on   the    environmental   chamber  size   or   the
 maneuverability required in  the greenhouse.   Carts  are  mounted on wheels
 so  the cart can  be  moved  within  the  greenhouse in  a  manner  defined  by
 statistical  requirements to  make   exposure  to  light and temperature more
 uniform.
                                          Soil-Core
                                          .Microcosms
           Agricultural
           Microcosm
           Styrofoam
           Insulation's^
Dnscopipe
                                                                    ®
                     leachate
            Figure 2. Arrangement of Microcosms in Styrofoam   Filled  Cart
                      (After EPA Test Prctoco1  (In Press))
                                       -9-
This document i'i  in process  of development  and is for A.STH committee use only.   It shall not
be reproduced or  circulated  or quoted, in whole  or in part, outside of ASTH committee
activities except with the approval  of the  chairman of the covittee with jurisdiction or
the President of  the Society.

-------
       6.2.1     Soil Core Extraction  -  Soil  cores are extracted from either
  a  natural grassland ecosystem or a typical  agricultural  soil  in the region
  of interest.   The intact system  is  extracted with  a  specially  designed,
  steel  extraction-tube (Van Voris  et  al_.  1982, 1983,  1984; 1982;  Zwick et
  a]_.  1984)  (Figure 3)  and a  backhoe.   The  steel extraction-  tube encases
  the  polyethylene  Driscopipe*  to  prevent  the  tube  from  warping  and/or
  splitting under pressures created during  extraction.  For  the agricultural
  microcosm, the plowed topsoil is moved aside  and saved.   Once  the core is
  cut  by  the leading'edge  of  the  driving tube,  it  is  forced up  into the
  microcosm tube.   For  the natural  grassland  ecosystem,  the vegetation is
  clipped before  the core is  extracted.  The  soil  core microcosm  is  later
  removed as a  single  unit  (soil  and  Driscopipe*) from  the extraction  tube
  and  taken to the laboratory.   For the  agricultural  microcosm,  the topsoil
                    Driscopipe®
               Rolled
               Steel
             Weld
              Stainless Steel
              Cutting Edge
                                                  Cap
                                                  Soil Core
                                                  Polyethylene
                                                  Microcosm Tube
                                                  Handles
                                                  Tube Holder
                                                  Stainless Steel
                                                  Cutting Edge
                Figure 3.  Diagram of Microcosm  Extraction Tube
                           (After Van Voris et £L  1985)
                                      -1.0-.
This document Is in process of development and is for ASTM committee use only.   It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or In part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the coanittee with Jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  1s  backfilled  Into  the  upper  20  cm  of  the  microcosm  tube.    It   is
  recognized  that this  extraction procedure  does disrupt  and compress the
  soil-core  to a  certain  extent;  however, the  tests  are being performed  to
  compare  different  treatment levels and controls within the experiment.
       6.2.2      Detailed chemical  and physical  properties of the  soil   in
  the   test   systems   need   to  be   determined  using   USDA  description
  nomenclature.    Information  such  as  pedologic identity,  according  to the
  USDA  7   Approximation  Soil  Classification System, percent organic matter,
  field capacity,  cation  exchange  capacity,  bulk  density,  macro-  and
  micro-nutrient  content,  organic  matter  content,  mineralogy,  exchange
  capacity, particle size distribution, hydraulic characteristics, and other
  Important  characteristics  need   to  be  measured  before and  after  the
  experiment   (Black  1965;   1982;   ASTM  D422-63,  D2167-84,   D2216-80,  and
  D2488-84).   The history of the soil,  including previous  crops  grown and
  pest  control  and other  management  practices  used,  should be documented  in
  order to assist in the  interpretation of the results.
       6.3.1      Microcosm  -   For  the   natural  ecosystem   (undisturbed
  grassland) test system,  natural  plant cover should be sufficiently diverse
  to be representative of plant species  in  the ecosystem of interest.  When
  the agricultural microcosm is used,  a mixture of  grasses and broad leaves
  (e.g.,  legumes) should  be included.  Two  or three  species  of  grasses  or
  legumes  that are typically  grown  together as an agricultural  crop in the
  region  of   interest   should  be  chosen.    The  species  chosen  must   be
  compatible regarding  growth habit  and  be  able to grow  to maturity in the
  small surface  area (240.5 cm2) of the microcosm.  In some cases, it may  be
  appropriate  to select  a grain crop in order  to  evaluate the uptake of the
  radiolabeled   test  substances  and  their  degradation  products in  grain
  normally grown for human consumption (Van Voris et al 1984).
       6.3.2      The seed  application rate should duplicate standard farming
  practice for the region of  interest.  Seeds  should  be  planted  evenly and
  covered with  an appropriate depth  of soil.   Similarly, the test substance
  application  form should approximate  a reasonable  scenario of how the test
	                         -11-
This document is In process of development and  is for ASTM conmittee use only.  It shall not
b« reproduced or circulated or quoted, In whole or in part, outside of ASTH eowiittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  substance  might arrive at the site  in  question.   If the  test substance  is
  a  solid, one  option is to mix it with  the  topsoil  prior  to planting,  thus
  mimicking  the  plowing of  an  agricultural  field  prior  to  sowing seed.
  Alternatively,  it may be  dusted  on the surface to simulate dry deposition.
       6.3.3     Plant  tissue   analysis   should be  consistent with those
  practices  that may be region  specific.   Plants  from  either the  natural
  grassland  ecosystem or the agricultural test unit  are harvested from  each
  microcosm  at  the end of  the  test  period (Van Voris  et al.  1982; Tolle  et
  al.  1982), and  air dried,  and then  oven-dried.   In the   range-finding
  test  (see  Section  7.3.1),  the  crop is harvested  four weeks  after first
  exposure  to  the  test  substance.   In  the definitive  test  (see   Section
  7.4.1),  plants  may  be  harvested  one  or  two  times  during  the   12-week
  growing period  or at the  end  of  the test.   The definitive test may  need  to
  be  extended  beyond  the  12-week  test  period  to accommodate  plant  species
  which take longer to reach  the desired maturity (e.g., seed production).
       6.4.1     Microcosm  Watering and Leachate Collection - Microcosms are
  watered as dictated by a predetermined  water regime  based on site  history
  with  either  purified laboratory water  (e.g., distilled,  Reverse Osmosis)
  or with rainwater that has  been  collected,  filtered and stored in a cooler
  at 4°C (Van Voris et a]_.  1980,  1982, 1983).  If comparisons are being made
  between microcosms and field  plots,  then  parallel  watering  in both units
  should be  attempted.   Care  needs to be  taken  to maintain  sufficient water,
  but over-watering can induce  fungal  disease and stress.
       6.4.2     Microcosms are leached at least once  before  and once every
  two or three weeks after  dosing.  However,  if natural rainfall amounts are
  higher  or  lower  this should be  used   to  guide selection  of  a leaching
  regime.  Caution should  be  exercised to not over water  because this may
  drastically alter the rate  of degradation,  transformation,  trans!ocation
  and transport within the  microcosm.
       6.4.3     Leachate  is  collected   in  0.1N  HC1   washed   flasks after
  excess  laboratory water  or  rainwater  has  been  added to each microcosm.
  The  500-ml flask  is attached to  the Buchner  funnel with Tygon   tubing,
	^                         -12-
This document is in process of development and ij for ASTM co™ittee use only.   It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in pert, outside of ASTM coimittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the cooB'ttee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  (see  Figure 2)  1n an attempt to Insure that  all  test  microcosms  will  leach
 within  a 2-day  period, 15%  more  microcosm  soil  cores are extracted  than
 are  required for  a  combination of  both  the  range  finding and  definitive
 tests.   When the  microcosms are  leached before  planting,  those which do
 not leach,  leach too quickly, or  take  longer than two days to produce  100
 ml  of  leachate  after  the  soil  has  been brought  to field  capacity  are
 discarded.
       6.5      Greenhouse and Grovth  Chamber Environments - Microcosms in
 Insulated   carts  or other   such  devices  .are  kept  in   a  greenhouse or
 environmental  chamber that  has  temperature and light control.   Greenhouse
 and environmental  chamber temperatures are designed to approximate outdoor
 temperatures  that occur during  a  typical  growing season 1n the region of
 Interest.   If  the experiment is not conducted in  the  greenhouse  during  the
 normal  agricultural  growing  season, then lights suitable for plant growth
 on  timing  devices  are used to  simulate the  photoperiod and  Intensity
 typical  for the  growing season in the area of interest.   If the  experiment
 1s conducted  in  the greenhouse during  periods when  the photoperiod of  the
 natural  light is  not  long enough to  Induce Cowering and  seed  set,  then
 supplimental  lighting  will be required.

 7.0   TEST  PROCEDURES

       7.1       Test   Purpose  aid  Assumptions   -  The   purpose  of   the
 terrestrial   soil-core  microcosm  test  is  to   determine  the  fate   and
 ecological  effects of  a test substance,  including transformation products,
 withir  a  site- specific natural grassland or agricultural ecosystem.   The
 relationship  of  fate  and  effects  data   from  treated  versus  control
 microcosms  is assumed to be  very  similar  to  that  from  treated versus
 control  field test plots  (Van  Voris  et al..   1982,  1983,  1984).    This
 assumption  is supported by the microcosm/field comparisons reported by Van
 Voris et aj_.  (1982,  1984), Jackson et  a]_.  (1979) and  Tolle et al.. (1983).
 The fate and effects  from  the  microcosm  test  should then be   related to
                                     -13-
fhij doci»ert Is in process of  development and is for ASTM cowaittee u»e only.  It thai! not
b* reproduced or circulated or  quoted, In whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of th« chairman of the cwwn'ttee with Jurisdiction or
the Pr«$ide.-t of the Society.

-------
 either  the  natural   or  agricultural   ecosystems  which  have  the  same
 combination  of  soil   type,  vegetation,  crop  species,  and  environmental
 variables used during  the  microcosm test.
      7.2.1     Evaluation  of Teat Substance  -  Physicochemical  information
 supplied for the test  substance (see Section 6.1.1) is used to tailor the
 general   range-finding  test   procedures  to   the   specific   substance.
 Phytotoxicity and/or bacteriostatic action, if known, should be taken into
 account  in designing  the  exposure  concentrations  of  the  range-finding
 experiment.  Only one  concentration above that known to cause at least 50?
 change in plant  growth or  50*  change in bacterial  growth/respiration needs
 to be tested.  In addition,  the lowest  treatment level should not be lower
 than a  factor of  10  in soil   and  100  in  water.    These factors  are  the
 analytical limits of detectability of the  parent  compound at the start of
 the experiment.
      7.2.2     The water solubility and soil  sorption capacity can be used
 to  determine  the  appropriate  frequency  of  leachate  analyses  for  the
 radiolabeled test substance and its transformation products.   This same
 information will also  determine the design  of the  soil sampling procedures
 for  the  range-finding  test.    Chemical   structure  and  any  degradation
 information are  used to  determine which transformation products to analyze
 for in the soil, leachate, and plant tissue collected.
      7.2.3     As was  stated in Section 6.3.2,  exposure should approximate
 a  reasonable  scenario.   The  water solubility, dissociation constant(s),
 and soil pH must be taken into account in determining  the  formulation of
 the chemical.  The  maximum concentration  of  a chemical  in  water solution
 should not exceed half of  saturation.   However, solubility may be markedly
 altered by ionization  in soil.   If  the  soil pH  is  such that a more soluble
 form is  likely,  the  test substance should  be adjusted  accordingly with
 either sodium  hydroxide or  hydrochloric acid  prior to  introduction into
 the microcosm.   If the  pH  adjustment  to  increase solubility  is  extreme
 (49),  chemical  and  photolytic degradation   may  be  enhanced  when
                                     -14-
This document  is in process of development and is for ASTM committee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced  or circulated or quoted, in nhole or in part, outside of ASTM conwittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the committee with Jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
 preparing  the chemical solutions.   In  all  cases, the exposure  formulation
 should  be  consistent with  the  hypothetical  scenario forming the basis for
 the test.
      7.3.1      Range-finding Test Experimental Design-  The range-finding
 test should  last four weeks  from first exposure  of the test substance to
 plant  harvest.  At  the  start  of  the  test, the  microcosms  are dosed  (see
 Section  7.5)  with a minimum of five concentrations of the test substance.
 Three replicate microcosms are used for each of the four or five treatment
 levels  and the controls,  resulting in a  total  of 15 or  18  microcosms.
 Concentrations typically  used  for dosing are  0.1,  1.0,  10,  100 ppm, if a
 hypothetical  scenario is  not  known  and, if deemed appropriate, 1000  g/g
 of topsoil in the upper 20 cm of the microcosm.  The logarithmic scale for
 dose levels in a range-finding test is suggested by Rand (1980).  The bulk
 density  (g/cm3)  of  the  dry  topsoil is  used   to  calculate  the exposures.
 Depending on  whether the potential mode of release  of the test chemical is
 likely  to  be  a single  accidental  spill or a  repeated  effluent release.
 Either  a single, "acute"  dose,  or a multiple  application, "chronic" dose,
 should   be   considered  and  selected   based   on  a  reasonable  exposure
 scenario.   In  either case,  the  total  amount of  test  chemical  applied
 should be equal  to  five  of the recommended test concentrations.
      7.3.2      Each  microcosm  cart,  holding one replicate of  each  of the
 four or five  test  concentrations and  a control, is moved  randomly on a
 weekly  basis  in the greenhouse to avoid location  induced  effects.   If no
 discernible   greenhouse   position   effects   are  recorded   during  the
 range-finding  test,  then  this  process need   not  be  followed  during the
 definitive test.
      7.3.3      The   range  finding  tests  yield   two  necessary  types  of
 Information.   These  include:  (1)  estimates   of the  bounds  of toxicity
 within which  the 50* response  (e.g. LD50)  lies  and (2) initial estimates
 of variance  1n response.   Given the identification of  bounds  of toxicity
 for the initial doses,  the dose  levels for  the definitive tests  may be
 refined.  The  variance estimates  should be  used to determine sample sizes
                                     -15-
This document is 1n process of development and is for ASTM cowr-'tte* use only.   It shall not
b«  reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTH conmittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the coa»ittee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  needed  in  the  definitive tests to achieve statistical  tests  able  to detect
  specified  differences  (A) among dose levels with a specified power  (1-B).
       7.4.1     Definitive Test Experimental  Design-  The  definitive  test
  lasts  for 12  or  more  weeks  from first exposure  of the  test chemical  to
  final harvest.  Test results may be influenced by extraneous environmental
  sources  of  variation,  such  as  temperature  or  light  gradients  within a
  greenhouse.   These sources  of  variation  may be accounted for by randomly
  repositioning   the ,cards  (see  7.3.2)  and/or  by  employing experimental
  designs  such  as  randomized block,  latin-square,  or  other more  complex
  designs.   If such extraneous sources of  variability  in  test results  are
  not  accounted  for, results may be biased, thus jeopardizing  the outcome of
  the  experiment.  The  types  of  statistical analyses  to  be  performed  are
  decided  at this point, dictated  largely by the experimental  and  treatment
  designs.   The experimental  designs  determine the method of  randomization
  of the  treatments to  account for extraneous  sources  of variability  in  the
  experiment environments, while  the  treatment design determines  number  of
  treatments and the arrangement of treatments with respect to one  another.
       7.4.2     At the  start of  the  test, the  microcosms are  dosed with
  three  concentrations  of  the  test substance.   The number of microcosms  to
  be  dosed  should  be  determined  by  the  desired  power  of  the statistical
  tests.   Power  is  influenced by  the variance  of the  response (estimated
  from range finding tests), the size of  the difference to be  detected among
  the  treatments, and  the  alpha  (x)  level.  The  desired power, alpha level
  and  detectable difference  are  specified  by  the researcher, the variance
  estimates  are  obtained from the  range finding  tests.   Based  on these four
  values,  the sample  size,  or nunber  of  replicates  for each dose level
  should  be determined  (see Neter and Wasserman, 1974  and Kasterbaum avel
  Hoel, 197C for discussion of power  of a  test).  The three treatment  levels
  chosen  are estimated  from  the  range-finding test data to produce a 20  to
  25%  change in productivity  for  each subsequent concentration of the test
  chemical.   In  order to  reduce analytical  costs associated  with  the fate
  studies,  the replicate microcosms in each  treatment  level are employed  as
~—i——,
This document ij in process of development and it for ASTM cownittee use only.   It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM cowiittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the committee with jurisdicticm or
the President of the Society.

-------
 replicate  pairs.   Thus, leachate and plant tissue analyses are conducted on
 the  polled  samples  from paired  microcosms.   Productivity  data,  on the
 other  hand,  are analyzed for each individual  microcosm.   Each cart  holds
 six  to  eight  microcosms  (see  Figure  2).    The  microcosms  paired for
 analyses are placed  in  different carts to insure that all  microcosms are
 housed under the most uniform conditions possible.
      7.4.3      Plant  Productivity -  Depending  on  the  type  of  natural
 vegetation or crop planted,  it  may be possible to  harvest  nore  than once
 (e.g.,  during  the middle  and  at the  end  of the  test).   If  growth  is
 vigorous,  grasses  may be harvested at a  pre-arranged height,  e.g., 2 to 6
 cm  above  soil  surface  during  the middle  of the  12  week test  period.
 Multiple harvests   permit evaluation  of  both gross plant yield  and  plant
 uptake of  the  test substance with  respect to time  (Elseewi  et  jil_.  1980;
 Van Voris et al_. 1984, 1985).
      7.5,1      Exposure  Techniques -  If the primary mode of  exposure of
 the  test  chemical  is  anticipated  to  be  by addition  of  pH  adjusted
 laboratory water or rainwater containing appropriate concentrations of the
 test  substance,  then  this  procedure  should  be  followed.   Again,  the
 following  procedure is used  unless information is available that suggests
 some other regime  should be  used or  that the  chemical  is associated with
 other chemicals or solvents.   In no case shall the total aqueous volume of
 exposure be  sufficient to cause microcosm leaching (i.e., > field
 capacity).    Recommended concentration  levels  are discussed in Sections 7.3
 and  7.4.   Test- substances  which are  likely to  be  released  into the
 environment  as  a liquid or powder, and which can  be mixed with water, are
 applied  as  a  single  dose  of  liquid  sufficient  in  volume  to  bring the
 microcosm  soil  surface  horizon  to  field  capacity.   The  volume  of
 laboratory water or rainwater  required  for  exposure  can  be  determined on
 an unplanted microcosm of the same soil  type on site; the volume selected
 should be identical  for all microcosms.   Carriers ether than water are not
 recommended  unless  they are  likely to be  released into the environment in
 conjunction  with  the effluent  stream  or accidental   spill  of  the  test
                                     -17-
This document  is In process of  development and it for A5TM comrnttee use only.  It shall not
be  reproduced  or circulated or  quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTX cownittee
activities except with the approval  of the chair-nan of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
  substance.   If a carrier  1s necessary, then  acetone or ethanol  should be
  considered;  however,  the use of carriers should be avoided  unless they are
  essential to produce  a realistic exposure.
       7.5.2      Several typical exposure modes are suggested for particular
  types of  test  substances  if  either  a   hypothetical  or  real  (actual)
  exposure scenario  is  not available.  If the test substance  is  likely to be
  a  contaminant  of  irrigation  water, it  should be  applied  every week  in
  proportionate concentrations,  such that  the  total   amount  applied  equals
  the  desired  treatment level.   If the  test substance  does not mix  with
  water,  it  should  be  applied  as  evenly  as possible  to  the   top  of  the
  unplanted microcosm and mixed  into  the  topsoil  prior to planting.   If the
  test  substance is  normally  sprayed on  growing plants  (e.g.,   pesticide),
  then  the desired amount should be mixed with the volume of  water necessary
  to wet  the  soil surface and wet the plants to  the  point where  they  begin
  to drip.   A  chromatography  sprayer or  nebulizer  should be used to  spray
  plants that are past  the seedling  stage.   The recommendations by the test
  substance's  manufacturer for field  spraying should  be followed  as  closely
  as possible, but  the test  should  be  terminated  (last  harvest) at  least
  eight weeks  after  the plants are sprayed.
       7.6.1      Waste  Disposal - All liquid (leachate) and solid  (soils and
  plant tissues)  samples must  be retained for proper  disposal.   All  sample
  collection  bottles,  collection apparatus,  microcosm  tubes (Driscopipe )
  and sampling  tools  should  be thoroughly cleaned (acid washed)  and analyzed
  for  radioactive contamination  before  they  are  stored or  used on  another
  test  system.   All   samples  and  the  remaining, undisturbed  portion of  the
  test  system  should be  disposed of in accordance   with  EPA  and  Nuclear
  Regulatory  Commission  (NRC) regulations,  if radiolabeled  compounds  were
  used.  Soil  leachate  and all other aqueous-sample  wastes should  be  treated
  prior to disposal using  one  or more of  the following techniques:
       (a) filtration
       (b) activated  charcoal  filtration
       (c) ion  exchange.
^-^—T
This document is in process of development and Is for ASTM ccxwrittee use only.   It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM contm'ttee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the cowiittee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
      7.6.2      Soils   contaminated    with   organic    residues   and/or
 radio!abeled   compounds  as  well  as  the  Driscopipe ,  sample  bottles,
 glassware,  gloves,  masks,  filters,   activated   charcoal   from  aqueous
 cleanup,  and  any  other potentially contaminated equipment  must be either
 certified as  uncontaminated or packaged and disposed of in accordance with
 existing  EPA  and NRC guidelines and regulations.

 8.0  FATE  AND EFFECTS SAMPLING PROCEDURFS

      Sampling procedures  have  "been divided  into  tvo basic  categories:
 ecological  effects sampling  and test-chemical fate  sampling.   Ecological
 effects   sampling  may   include  productivity  measurements,   physical
 appearance  of  plants,   and  nutrient   less  or   uptake   measurements.
 Test-chemical  fate  sampling  may   include   leachate,   soil,   and  plant
 analyses.
      8.1.1.1    Ecological  Effects Sampling - Productivity  Measurements -
 Primary  productivity   is  a  commonly  measured  parameter  in  terrestrial
 effects testing.  Depending  on  the  plant species, it  may be desirable to
 report total  yield or  yield  by plant  part.   For  example,  in the  case of
 grain crops such as soybeans, oats,  and wheat, the total  biomass yield can
 be reported in  addition  to the  grain  yield.   This will  allow  a relative
 comparison  of total  biomass yield with  grain yields typically reported for
 local agriculture.  In addition, separate  grain samples  may be  useful for
 later tissue  analyses to determine whether  the  test  chemical was enriched
 in potentially  edible  plant parts.   For other  systems, such  as  natural
 grassland microcosms,  segregation into  plant parts may be unnecessary.
      8.1.1.2    At  a minimum, productivity should be  reported  as oven-dry
 weight.   Jones and  Steyn  (1973) recommend  65°C for 24  hours  as adequate
 conditions  for drying  without  unnecessary thermal decomposition of plant
 material.   Information on  the chemical's  volatility  should  be evaluated
 when  selecting  a  drying  temperature.    It  may  be  desirable  in  some
 circumstances  to  report air-dry  productivity or  to  be able to calculate
                                     -19-
This document  i~» In  process of  development and  Is for ASTM conw'ttee use on1/.  It  shall not
be reproduced  or circulated or  quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the cotw'tte* with jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
 air-dry yields  based  on  moisture loss after oven-drying.   These data could
 be  useful  if agricultural  crops are the plants  used 1n the microcosm and
 if  it  is  desirable to compare  productivity with  yields reported  1n local
 agriculture.
      8.1.1.3    The  number of harvests will  depend on the plants grown.  An
 agricultural  crop,  alfalfa/timothy  for example,  may  require  two or  more
 harvests over the course of the testing period (Malanchuk  et jil_.  1980;
 Van Voris et al_. 1984).
      8.1.2      Physical  Appearance of Plants - Throughout  the  test period,
 it  is  desirable  to   record the physical, appearance of plants  1n  the
 terrestrial  microcosm.    Symptoms   of  nutrient   deficiency or  toxicity,
 pathogenicity,  water stress,   or   test-chemical-induced  toxicity  should
 be  monitored.   These  observations  may be  useful   in  interpreting  the
 specific  ecological  effects  of  a  test  chemical  relative  to  responses
 in   plants   elicited  by  known   environmental   toxicants  or   stresses
 (Daubenmire  1959).  Careful  observation on  physical appearance in controls
 vs.  treated  microcosms  may also  aid in  determining whether  abnormal
 physical appearance is a result of the test chemical or 1s a manifestation
 of microcosm management.
      8.1.3.1    Nutrient   Loss  Measurements   -   An  important   ecological
 effects  sampling procedure  is  to  monitor  nutrient  losses  in  leachates
 (O'Neill et  a_l_. 1977; Van Voris  et  al_.  1980;  Jackson et al_. 1978; Jackson
 et aj_. 1979).   The  rationale for such monitoring is explained  in  detail  in
 the accompanying support document.   One of  the desirable attributes  of the
 terrestrial  microcosm approach  to  testing  chemicals 1s the relative  ease
 with which soil leachates can be collected.   This offers  the  potential  to
 construct nutrient  budgets for  the model  ecosystem (Schindler £t  al_. 1980;
 Gile and Gillett 1979).
      8.1.3.2    The  final   suite  of   nutrients   monitored  in   leachates
 probably will   depend  on  the nature of  the test chemical Ausmus  e£ £l_.
 1978; Ausmus et al_. 1979;  Jackson et £l_.  1979; Harris et al_. 1980).   Those
 nutrients which initially should be  considered  during the range-finding
                                     -20-
This document  is in process of development and Is for ASTH cownittee use only.  It shall not
be  reproduced  or circulated or quoted, In whole or 1n part, outside of ASTM cownittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the comtiittee with jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
 test   include  calcium,   potassium,   nitrate-nitrogen,   ortho-phosphate,
 ammonium-  nitrogen,  and dissolved organic  carbon  (DOC).   Depending on the
 results  of nutrient losses  measured during the range-finding  test,  a set
 of nutrients  can  be  selected for monitoring during the definitive test.
      8.1.3.3    Various   methods  exist   to  analyze   for  the  nutrients.
 Standard  techniques which  have  proven  useful  Include  atomic  absorption
 spectrophotometry for Ca  and K and analysis using a Technicon Autoanalyzer
 II  for  nitrate-nitrogen,  ortho-phosphate,  DOC,  and  ammonium-nitrogen
 (ASTM .0511-84, D515-82,  D1254-67,  D1426-79, and  D3867-79;  Association of
 Official Analytical  Chemists (AOAC)  1975; American Society for Testing and
 Materials  1979; EPA  1979).  For less rigorous determinations, e.g., during
 the range-finding test, Ion-specific electrodes may be useful for nitrate-
 and ammonium-nitrogen.
      8.1.3.4    A  standard  procedure,  described  below,  has  proven  to be
 useful   in  handling leachates.    As  soon  as  soil   water  samples  are
 collected,  the sample  volume  1s  recorded  and the  pH determined  using a
 glass electrode.   Samples are  centrifuged  at  low  speed (e.g. 5000 rpm) to
 remove large  particulates and  filtered  through a  0.45-micron filter.  The
 sample should  be  divided  into two aliquots  prior to storage in the dark at
 4°C.   Blanks   consisting   of distilled  water and  reference standards in
 Instrument calibration  quantities should be prepared and stored similarly.
      8.2.1     Teet-Chertical Pate Sampling - The fate of the test chemical
 (see  EPA 1982b)  will  be  determined by  methods  appropriate to  the  test,
 including  sensitivity factors adequate  to  verify  exposure and distinguish
 between  parent material,  transformation  products,  and naturally occurring
 materials  present in the  test system.   Usually this will  involve use  of a
 radiolabeled   parent  compound   and  subsequent   analysis   of  microcosm
 components for radioactivity  end chemical   identity.   Methods  appropriate
 to  the   latter may  be  adequate  for quantification  of fate,  but usually
 cannot  reveal  bound  residues   in   soil   or  plants  and  frequently  are
 Inadequate for cost-effectively  tracing movement  and  transformation.  To
 the extent that the  fate  1n  soil  and plants is well enough understood  from
 other experiments and depending on  the  degree  to  which the microcosm  test

                                     -21-
TMs document la In process of development and  1* for ASTM conmltte* use or.ly.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, In ottol* or 1n pert, outside of ASTM coomltte*
activities eicept «1th th* approval of the chairman of the conmlttee with jurisdiction or
the Pre»1dent of the Society.

-------
  is  being  employed  to  verify  fate  and  exposure  hypotheses, analytical
  requirements  may  be  reduced  (Harvey  1983;  Lichtenstein  et al_.   1972;
  Lichtenstein  et aj_.  1973;  Metcalf et £l_. 1973; Cole et aK  1976).
       8.2.2      Radiolabeling the Parent Compound - The parent  compound may
  be  labeled  with  1I+C  either  in an  appropriate  aromatic,  cyclic  carbon
  group,   or   linear  chain   (Lichtenstein  e£  al.  1974).   Other  labels,
  including stable isotopes  such as  15N  may  be more useful and  Informative.
  In  order for the microcosm  test  to permit an analysis of the fate  of the
  parent  compound and/or its metabolites, attention  should be paid to known
  or  hypothesized metabolic  pathways for test substances.   Hence  the site
  and form of  label  is an  integral part  of the  total   test  design.  The
  laboratory  conducting  the  test is  not  required  to  have the capability for
  radiolabeling,   since  this  is  routinely  handled  by  speciality  chemical
  firms.   Sufficient  radioactivity must  be  present  in  order  to  detect at
  least \% of the initial parent compound in  a  typical  sample of leachate,
  soil  or plant tissue.
       8.2.3.1    Compartment  Analysis  for  Labeled  Compomds     Several
  compartments   of   the  terrestrial   microcosm   can   be   analyzed  for
  radioactivity,  which  include:   samples  of  soil  leachate,  plant  tissue,
  including roots  and  shoots;  and soil  from different depths.  The different
  soil  depths used  for  radiochemical analyses  should be  selected  based on
  information on  soil  sorption of  the compound of  interest.   From previous
  experience, these  depths  should  be relatively  close to  the  soil  surface
  (1-2  cm) for  radiolabeled  chemicals that are  strongly  sorbed to soils; if
  any isotope appears in  the  leachate,  the depth  selection should  be  lower
  in  the  soil  profile.   Samples  will   be  homogenized  and  extracted with
  solvents appropriate for the parent compound.  Additional extraction steps
  may be  necessary  such  as  acidification  and  extraction  with  non-polar
  solvents,   sohxlet   extractions  with   polar  and/or  non-polar  solvents,
  alkaline or acid hydrolysis with or without  heat,  detergent extractions,
  or  protease digestion.  The 1UC in the  soil  or plant samples which  cannot
  be  extracted will   be  oxidized  and analyzed as  lt*CQ2  as  described  by
____                         ~22~
This document Is in process of development and is for ASTM committee use only.   It shall not
b« reproduced or circulated or cuoted, ir whole or in part, outside of ASTM coomittee
activities except with the approva'. of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
 Lichtenstein  £t  a]_.   (1972)  or  dissolved   in  Protosol  and  Aquasol  as
 described  by  Cole  et  al.  (1976).   The  extracts  and  the  oxidized  or
 dissolved  samples will be counted by !I*C liquid scintillation  (Metcalf et
 a]_. 1973;  Cole^et al_.  1976).
      8.2.3.2    At the termination  of the range-finding  test, soil  samples
 will  be collected  from  the  top, middle,  and bottom of  the  60-cm  soil
 cores.   If the labeled compounds  or Its metabolites  are not detected  by
 liquid  scintillation in the deeper soil  samples, then soil  samples  at the
 end of  the definitive  test  should be taken  closer  to the top of the  soil
 column.
      8.2.4     Identification   of   Degradation    Products        Liquid
 scintillation  will  identify  the  presence  of  ll4C-labeled  compounds  in
 sample  extracts,  but  the  identification and  quantification of the  parent
 compound   or    its    degradation    products   will    require   gas-liquid
 chromatography   (GLC),  and   thin-layer  chromatography  (TLC)  or   high
 performance   liquid   chromatography  (HPLC)   (I).   S.   EPA  1982b).    TLC
 autoradiography  using  no-screen  X-ray film  for chromatographed  fractions
 found  to  be  radioactive  by  liquid scintillation  counting  (Cole  et  al.
 1976; Metcalf .et_  a]_.  1973) is most cost-effective.   Whenever possible, the
 identity  of  the  parent  compound  and   probable  degradation  products  in
 fractions  found to be  radioactive by liquid scintillation  counting  (Cole
 et_  al_.  1976;  Metcalf et.  ^1_.   1973)   will  be  verified  by  gas-liquid
 chromatography  methods.   Also,  the  concentration  of  the parent  compound
 and   degradation   products   should   be   verified   by   an   alternative
 chromatographic methods system (e.g., HPLC or  GLC)  with  known standards.

 9.0  DATA ANALYSIS

      9.1   Ecological   Effects  Analysis-   A   combination  of   statistical
 analysis   procedures  are  suggested  to  evaluate  the  data  collected  to
 discern  ecological  effects.    Regression,   correlation,   and  covariance
 analysis,  as well  as analysis of  variance (ANOVA) procedures described in
                                     -23-
This document fs in process of development »nd is for ASTM committee use only.  It shall not
b«  reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of  ASTM conitiittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction  or
the President of the Society.

-------
  the  following  section may be as appropriate methods for  data  analysis.  Use
  of these  or  other analysis techniques will be determined by the objectives
  of the  experiments and the original experimental and treatment designs.  A
  number   of  statistical   references  describe   the   common   methods  of
  statistical  analysis  (Sokal  and  Rohlf 1981;  Snedecor  and  Cochran  1980;
  Steel  and Torrie 1980).  The  level of  significance  for all statistical
  tests  of hypothesis  is set at  the 5? level  (a - 0.05)  and  power of  the
  test (1-B)  at  0.90 or  .095  unless otherwise defined.   The results of  all
  statistical  tests  performed on  all  data  must be  fully  documented  for
  evaluation.  In  addition, graphs displaying the data and  tables containing
  all  raw numbers  should be appended to the submittal.
      9.1.1     Test Material Effects- Because  the  mode of  exposing  the
  test system  can  be done without  the use  of carrier chemicals (see Section
  6.2.3 and 6.5.1), there is no  need to perform separate analyses on carrier
  effects as  suggested in  the  marine  and  freshwater  microcosm protocols.
  This may be mandatory  however,   if  it  becomes  advisable to  use carrier
  chemicals.
      9.1.2     Productivity  of  Natural or  Planted  Vegetation   The    sum
  total  of both air-dry and  oven-dry biomass  expressed  in  g/m2  collected
  during  and at  the end of the definitive test should be evaluated initially
  by   using  side-by-side   histograms  displaying   the   calculated  means,
  and  95% confidence intervals for controls and  all  exposure levels.  This
  will  allow  early visual  evaluation  of  the  effects  of the  chemical  by
  exposure  level.   Variance  estimates may  indicate whether  logarithmic or
  some other transformation of the data may be necessary for graphic display
  and  analysis.  Analysis of variance  (ANOVA)  calculations (Sokal  and  Rohlf
  1981;  or  Steel and Torrie 1980)  should  be  carried out  first to test  for
  position  effects  within the carts  and within  the environmental  area  where
  the  test was  performed.  Position effects  may be  accounted for  in  the
  design  of the  experiment  (e.g., by blocking)  and any  effect of position
  can  then  be  accounted for in subsequent analyses.  If these tests prove to
  be  significant at  the 5%  level   (a  =  0.05),  then this will need  to be
__.__                         ~24~
This document is in process of development and it for ASTW committee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or ir. part, outside of ASTM conwittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
 accounted  for  in  the  remainder of  the statistical  analyses.   Pair-wise
 comparisons  of variables  that are measured only once  during  the  12-week
 experiment may be  necessary (Snedecor and Cochran 1980).
      9.1.3.1    Statistical  Methods   -   In  order   for  any  statistical
 procedures to be applicable,  all experimental  microcosms must be assigned
 to  the  experimental treatment  level  by some random  process.   This  may be
 accomplished  through use  of  a completely  randomized experimental  design,
 randomized block,  Latin-square or  other appropriate experimental  designs.
 As  stated earlier, if an  appropriate  experimental  design is  not used, the
 results  and  analysis may  be  biased,  thus jeopardizing  the outcome  of the
 experiment.   Analysis of  variance  (ANOVA)  procedures should  be performed
 on  biomass  data  in order  to determine  if  an ecological effect  resulted
 from  the  treatment  levels  of  the  parent  compound  and  transformation
 products.  If the ANOVA  is significant, then  Orthogonal  comparisons  or a
 multiple-range comparison such as Duncan's should be performed in order to
 determine which of  the  treatment  means were  different from  the  others.
 The  undosed  controls  are  considered  to be  one  of  the  treatment  levels.
 Again,  the  5i level  (o   =  0.05)  should be  considered as  the level  of
 significance  for  all  tests  and the  power should  be  0.90  or  0.95.   All
 values,  whether significant or not, must be reported for each statistical
 test being  performed.   Where more  than a  single  factor or  treatment is
 incorporated  into the  original  experimental  design a  factorial ANOVA is
 the appropriate test  to conduct.
      9.1.3.2    Regression analysis  should subsequently be performed on the
 productivity  results.   Outlier data,  defined  as  an obvious  data recording
 or  reporting  error, should be  excluded; however, these  data  and  the fact
 that they have been excluded  must be reported.  If a substantial number of
 data  points   have  been  declared  as   outliers,  deficiencies   in  quality
 control  may  necessitate  rerunning  the  test.   Once outlying  values  have
 been detected  and  removed from further statistical  evaluations, regression
 models or Probit analysis can be used  to estimate the concentration where
 501  of  the  productivity  realized  in  the  controls  occurred  for the  test
                                     -25-
This document  i» In process of development and  it for ASTM co»»ittee use only.  It shall not
be  reproduced  or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
• ct1v1ties except with the approval of the chairman of the cownittee with jurisdiction or
the President  of th« Society.

-------
  substance   (EC5Q).    Ordinary   linear   least  squares   regression  analysis
  may  be performed to define the  response of relevant production parameters
  as  functions of dose.   If  it  appears  that productivity 1s nonlinear with
  respect  to  dose, it may be  necessary to transform the data or fit either a
  quadratic  or  cubic least-squares  regression  model to the data  for this
  type of response.   Utilization  of computer software  packages  such as SAS
  (Statistical  Analysis  System)  or BMDP  (Biomedical Computer  Program) may
  prove useful.
       9.1.4      Physical  Appearance  of Plants   -  Changes  in  physical
  appearance  in  plants in the terrestrial  microcosms should be reported for
  all  test units.  No statistical  evaluations of the effects of the chemical
  and  transformation  products on appearance are to be performed unless there
  is  a  clearly   identifiable pattern of  effects.   In  this case,  clearly
  recognizable   patterns  of  injury to  plants  may  be   ranked  in terms  of
  severity.   A  non-parametric  test,  such  as  Kruskal-Wallis  test,  may  be
  conducted to test for differences in plant injury.
       9.1.5.1    nutrient Losses   -   Based on  the  nutrient  or  nutrients
  selected for analysis  in the  soil  leachate (see  Section 8.3.1) collected
  from each   microcosm,   the  total cumulative  nutrient  loss for  each test
  system for  each nutrient should be  calculated  by (a)  multiplying nutrient
  loss  concentration from  each  collection date  times  the  total  volume
  leached  from that microcosm for that collection  date, and (b) then adding
  it to the previous  sum of total loss.    Plots of  the  collection date means
  (±SE)  of the cumulative nutrient losses for each treatment level should be
  developed  as   a  function  of  days after seeding for the  agricultural
  microcosm  or  days   after  exposure  for  the  natural   grassland  microcosm.
  Zero  loss should be the starting  point; if there was  no leachate  for any
  microcosm during a  particular collection period,  the  data point should be
  recorded as zero so that no data are considered missing.
       9.1.5.2    A one-way ANOVA should  be performed on the total cumulative
  nutrient loss  data  at  the end  of the experiment, to evaluate the treatment
  level  effects.   A multiple  comparison  procedure,  such as Duncan's, may be
            _                         -26-
This document i» in process of development and is for ASTM conmittee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM conwnittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the coawittee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
 used  to  determine which specific  treatment means were different from each
 other.
       9.1.5.3   Regression/correlation  analysis  comparing  nutrient losses
 versus  productivity  should  be performed  to  determine  the relationship
 between  these two  independently measured  variables.   In order to perform
 this  analysis the productivity and cumulative leachate loss  measures, must
 be matched  unit  for unit.   This test should be performed for each nutrient
 analyzed  versus  productivity.
       9.2  Chemical Tate  Analysis  - At  the  end of  the  experiment,  the
 budget or distribution of the  parent compound and transformation products
 1s  calculated  for  each  exposure  (concentration)   level.  This  entails
 determining  the  amount  added  and  the  subsequent  distribution  of  the
 radioactivity of the  parent compound and  transformation products through
 chemical  analysis  in  each of  the  primary compartments,  soil,  H20,  plant
 tissue and  air of  the  test  system as well as  in the soil leachate.   Fate
 analysis  should  result  in  distribution  values for above-ground  plant
 tissues,  plant  roots,  each  soil  depth  (see  Section 8.2.3), and  loss to
 soil  leachate.   Gaseous  loss  can be  estimated.   This  is followed  by
 performing  statistical  analyses for each exposure level on any differences
 in   distribution   of   the    compound   throughout   the    test   system.
 Multi-compartmental    modeling  and   multivariable  analyses   such   as
 multivariate analysis of  variance  may  also prove useful  in assessing the
 fate  of parent compounds  and transformation products.
       9.2.1.1   Radioactivity  Budgets  -  The  calculation  of  a  complete
 budget of all radioactivity  is required to be  submitted with  the results
 of this  test.  The budget must show the percent  of the  compound that was
 tagged and  the  location of the  tag.  The label  may  be 1UC,  stable 15N, or
 another suitable  label  and should be located  in  a portion of the molecule
 expected  to persist and/or have biological activity.
       9.2.1.2  Total  Radioactivity Added  -  The  total radioactivity added
 per test  unit is  based  on  the decay rate of the radioactive  tag, the total
 amount of radioactive tag  added to the  compound when  initially formulated,
	                         -27-
Ihfs document is in process of  development and  1s for ASTM co«»itte* use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or  quoted, in whole or in part, outtide of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the corwitte* irith jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  the  length  of time  between formulation and test unit exposure  (radioactive
  decay),  and the  particular exposure level of the test unit.
       9.2.1.3  Total  Radioactivity  Removed  -  The  total  radioactivity
  removed  from the microcosm is based on the concentration of the radiolabel
  in  (a)  the  soil  leachate  concentration times the  volume of soil  leachate
  lost per collection  date,  (b)  the calculated  gas  phase losses  of  the
  compound, and (c) the type of radiolabel and the rate of radioactive  decay
  of that  label  over  the  length of the experiment.
       9.2.1.4  Total  Radioactivity  Remaining  -  The total  radioactivity
  remaining in the microcosm is based  on radiolabel  analysis of each of  the
  primary  compartments  (a)  above-ground  plant  tissues,  (b)   plant   roots
  (i.e.,  cleaned of  soil  particles) and (c)  the distribution of the .label
  through  the different soil  depths.  The soil depths to be analyzed will  be
 -based on a  range-finding  evaluation as suggested in section 8.2.3.
       9.3.1     Fate of  Parent   Compound and  Transformation  Products  -
  Calculations  should  be  made  for  each  exposure   (concentration)   level
  relative to the  percent  distribution of  the  test  substance for (a) above-
  ground   plant  tissues,   (b)   below-ground plant  tissues,  (c)   each  depth
  through  the soil  profile, (d) losses to  soil  leachate,  and (e) calculated
  total  vaporization  or  gaseous losses.   In addition,  an analysis  of  the
  time to reach steady-state  loss of  the  chemical   compound  in  the  soil
  leachate and  the time  to  initiate compound  leaching from  each  exposure
  level should be  calculated.  For those exposure levels  where  the time  to
  reach steady state  loss in  the  soil  leachate is greater than the length  of
  the  experimental  period  (12  weeks)  then an extrapolation  of a regression
  model may  be  used  to  estimate  the time  necessary to  reach  steady  state
  (Snedecor and Cochran 1980).   This should be done  cautiously and with  the
  assumption  that  the shape of the response beyond  the  experimental period
  is the same  as that estimated for the experimental  period.
                                     -28-
This document is in process of development and Is for A5TM committee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole OP in part, outside of ASTM comnittee
activities except with the approval of the chairman of the cownittee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
      9.3.2      The calculations  for  the  final  distribution  of  the  test
 material  and  transformation  products are  based on  the measured  radio-
 activity  1n  that  compartment on a per gram basis times the total weight or
 volume  of material  1n  that compartment,  expressed  on a dry  weight basis
 where  appropriate.  All  calculations, are subsequently  corrected  for the
 radioactive  decay occurring since the  beginning of the experiment.   The
 quantities  of compound  are  to be expressed  as a percent of  the original
 compound  added to the  test  system.   An ANOVA  test  should be  performed on
 the  calculated  mean  percentage  remaining  for  each  of  the  four  main
 compartments to discern any differences among exposure concentrations.  It
 may be  necessary  to  transform the percentage data prior  to ANOVA 1n order
 to  satisfy  the  assumptions  of  the  analysis.   In addition,  regression
 analyses  should be  performed  comparing  above-ground productivity  versus
 concentration  of   parent   compound   and   transformation   products   in
 above-ground  plant  tissues,   and  cumulative  nutrient  losses  for  each
 exposure  concentration  versus parent  compound  and transformation products
 in the  soil  leachate.
      9.4.1      B-ioconcentraticn and Enrichment -  Calculate the concentra-
 tion of the  radioactivity in the  above-ground plant  tissues and in the top
 15 cm of  soil on  a concentration per  unit dry  weight  basis.   The ratio of
 the plant tissue  concentration to soil  concentration  is then  defined as
 the Bioconcentration Factor (BF).  Side-by-slde  histograms displaying the
 BF ratios should then be compared for statistical differences.
      9.4.2      Enrichment ratios  (ER) should be  calculated for the higher
 exposure  levels by dividing the  activity  expressed  on a dry  weight basis
 in  a   higher  exposure   level  by  the  lowest exposure  level   in which  a
 significant   (i.e.,   detectable)   concentration   could  be   analytically
 determined.   The  enrichment  ratio  is  then  regressed  against  exposure
 concentration  to determine the linearity  of  the  uptake of the chemical as
 measured  through the radiolabeled portion of the  chemical.   If it appears
 that an ordinary  least  squares regression  analysis  is  not the appropriate
 function  defining  the enrichment  of the chemical  then  an attempt to fit a
 quadratic  or  cubic  equation  should   be  made.   The  above guidelines  for

                                     -29-
This document 1* in process of  development and 1» for ASTM committee u»e only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or  quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
 calculating  BFs and  ERs  assume  that no  wet analytical  chemistry has been
 performed  to   separate   the  parent  compounds  from  the   transformation
 products in  each compartment.   If this  has been done,  then  individual BFs
 and ERs should be calculated as  outlined above.
                                        -30-
Tr.is document Is In process of development and is for ASTM committee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or In part, outside of ASTX co»«ittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
                    10.0 TEST PROTOCOL BIBLIOGRAPHY
 Association of  Official  Analytical  Chemists.   1975.  Official Methods  of
 Analysis   of  the  Association  of   Official   Analytical   Chemists.    12th
 Edition.   Washington, D.C., 1094 pp.

 American  Society  for Testing and  Materials.   1979.   Annual  book of  ASTM
 Standards.   Part  31,  Water.   American  Society for Testing and Materials,
 Philadelphia, PA.  128 pp.

 Ausmus  BS, Dodson, GF,  & Jackson DR.   1978.   Behavior of heavy  metals  in
 forest  microcosms: III.   Effects  on litter-soil carbon metabolism.   Water
 A1r Soil  Pollut. 10:19-29.

 Ausmus  BS, Kimbrough  S,  Jackson DR, & Llndberg S.   1979.  The behavior of
 hexachlorobenzene  in pine  forest  microcosms: transport and  effects  on
 soil processes.   Environ. Pollut. 20:103-111.

 Black,  CA  (ed).  1965.   Methods   of   Soil   Analysis  I.    Physical   and
 Minerological  Properties.  American  Society  of Agronomy,  Madison, WI.
 770 pp.

 Black,  CA   (ed).   1982.    Methods   of  Soil   Analysis  II.    Chemical   and
 Microbiological   Properties.   2n  Edition  American  Society  of  Agronomy,
 Madison,  WI.   802 pp.

 Cairns  J,  Jr.    1981.   Testing  for effects  of chemicals  on  ecosystems.
 National  Academy of Science, Washington, D.C.   103  pp.

 Cairns  J, Jr. ed.  1985.   Multispecies  Toxicity Testing.  Pergamon  Press,
 New York.   253  pp.
                                     -31-
TM» docunent is 1" process of development and 1» for ASTH coewittee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted,  1n »hole or in part, outside of AST* co«»1ttee
activities except with the approval of  the chairman of the co««iitte« with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  Cole  LK, Sanborn  OR,  & Metcalf  RL.   1976.   Inhibition of corn  growth by
  aldrin  and  the insecticide's fate  in  the soil, air, crop,  and  wildlife of
  a  terrestrial  model  ecosystem.  Environ.  Entomol.  5:583-589.

  Daubenmire, R. 1959.  A canopy  cover method of vegetation  analysis.  N.W.
  Science 33: 43-64.

  Elseewi AA, Straughan  IR,  & Page  AL.  1980.   Sequential  cropping  of fly
  ash-amended soils:   Effects  on soil  chemical  properties and yield and
  elemental composition of plants.  Sci. Tot.  Environ.   15:247-259.

  Environmental  Protection Agency.   1979.   Manual of Analytical  Methods for
  the  Analysis  of Pesticide  Residues  1n  Human  and Environmental  Samples.
  Health  Effects Research Laboratory. Research Triangle  Park, N.C.

  Environmental   Protection  Agency.    1982a.    Environmental   Effects  Test
  Guidelines.  Washington, DC.   Office of  Pesticides and Toxic  Substances,
  U.S.  EPA.    EPA  560/6-82-002.   Available  from   NTIS,  Springfield,  VA
  PB82-232992.

  Environmental  Protection Agency.   1982b.  Chemical  Fate Test  Guidelines.
  Washington, DC.   Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances, U.S.  EPA.  EPA
  560/6-82-003.   Available from NTIS, Springfield, VA PB82-233008.

  Environmental   Protection   Agency  (In  Press).   Experimental  Terrestrial
  Soil-Core Microcosm Test Protocol.  A Method  for Measuring  the  Potential
  Ecological  effects,  Fate,  and  Transport  of  Chemicals  in  Terrestrial
  Ecosystems.  Con/all is  Environmental  Research Laboratory  Research  Report
  71.

  Gile  JD, &  Gillett  JW.   1979.   Fate of  selected  fungicides in  a terres-
  trial laboratory ecosystem.  J. Agric. Food  Chem.  27:1159-1164.
                                     -32-
TMs document is in process of development and is for ASTM committee use only.  It  shall  not
be  reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM committee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
 Harris  WF, Ausmus  BS, Eddlemon  GK, Giddings  JM,  Jackson DR,  Luxmore RJ,
 O'Neill  EG,  O'Neill  RV,  Ross-Todd M, and  Van  Voris P.   1980.   Microcosms
 as  potential  screening  tools  for  evaluating  transport and  effects  of
 toxic   substances.    ORNL/EPA-4,   EPA-600/3-80-042.    Environ.   Sci.   Div.
 Pub!-No.  1506,  Oak Ridge, TN.  453  pp.

 Harvey  J,  Jr.   1983.  A  simple  method of evaluating soil  breakdown of lkC
 pesticides under ffeld conditions.   Residue  Rev. 85:149-158.

 Jackson  DR,  Selvidge WJ, & Ausmus BS.   1978.  Behavior of heavy  metals in
 forest  microcosms:  II.  Effects on  nutrient  cycling processes.   Water Air
 Soil Pollut.  10:13-18.

 Jackson  DR,  Ausmus  BS,  & Levin M.   1979.   Effects of arsenic  on nutrient
 dynamics of  grassland microcosms  and field plots.   Water  Air  Soil  Pollut.
 11:3-12.

 Jones  JB,  &  Steyn  WJA.   1973.   Sampling, handling,  and analyzing  plant
 tissue  samples,  pp.  249-270.   In:   LM  Walsh and  JD Beaton eds.   Soil
 Testing  and  Plant  Analysis.   Soil  Science  Society  of  America,  Inc.,
 Madison, WI.

 Kastenbaum,  M.  A.  and  D.   G.  Hoel.   1970.   Sample  size  requirements:
 one-way analysis  of variance.  Biometn'ka  57(2):421-430

 Laskowski  DA,  Goring  CAI,   McCall   PJ,  & Swann   RL.   1982.   Terrestrial
 environment,  pp.  198-240.  In:   RA Conway ed.  Environmental  Risk Analysis
 for Chemicals.   Van Nostrand Reinhold Company,-New York,  NY.

 Lichtenstein  EP,  Schulz  KR,  & Fuhremann  TW.   1972.  Movement  and  fate of-
 dyfonate in soils  under leaching and nonleaching conditions.   J.  Agr. Food
 Chem.                                                            20:831-838.
                                     -33-
TMs document ii 1" process of development and Is for ASTX conittee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted,  In whole or 1n part, outside of  ASTM committee
activities except with the approval of  the chairman of the co*e;ttee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  Lichtenstein  EP, Fuhremann  TW,  Schulz KR,  Hang TT.   1973.   Effects  of
  field  application methods on the  persistence and metabolism of phorate  1n
  soils  and  its  translocation  into crops.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  66:863-866.

  Lichtenstein  EP,  Fuhremann  TW,  &  Schulz  KR.   1974.   Translocation and
  metabolism of (UC)  phorate as  affected  by percolating  water 1n a  model
  soil-plant ecosystem.   J.  Agr.  Food Chem. 22:991-996.

  Malanchuk  JL,  Mueller CA, & Pomerantz SM.  1980.  Microcosm evaluation  of
  the  agricultural potential  of  fly-ash-amended  soils,  pp.  1034-1049.   In:
  JP  Giesy,  Jr. ed.  Microcosms  1n Ecological  Research, CONF-781101.   U.S.
  Department of  Energy,  Technical Information  Center.

  Metcalf  RL,  Kapoor  IP,  Lu P,  Schuth  CK,  &   Sherman  P.   1973.   Model
  ecosystem   studies   of  the  environmental   fate  of  six  organochlorlne
  pesticides.  Environ.  Hlth.  Perspect. 4:35-44.

  O'Neill  RV, Ausmus  BS, Jackson DR, Van  Hook RI, Van Voris  P,  Washburne  C,
  &  Watson  AP.    1977.   Monitoring  terrestrial  ecosystems  by  analysis  of
  nutrient export.  Water Air  Soil  Pollut. 8:271-277.

  Neter, J & Wasserman W.   1974.   Applied linear statistical models,  Irwin.
  Homewood,  IL.

  Parkinson,  D,  TRG  Gray,  ST Williams.   1971.   Methods  for  Studying the
  Ecology  of  Soil  Micro-organisms.     IBP-Handbook   No.    19.    Blackwell
  Scientific  Publications, Oxford,  England. 115 p.

  PhilHpson,  J.  1971.    Methods  of  Study  in  Quantitative  Soil   Ecology,
  Population, Production and  Energy Flow.   IBP-Handbook No. 18.   Blackwell
  Scientific  Pub-lications, Oxford,  England.  297  p.
                                     -34-
TMs document  is in process of development and Is for ASTM coowittee use only.  It shall not
be reproduced  or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of ASTM coawittee
activities except with the approval  of the chairman of the cownittee with jurisdiction or
the President  of the Society.

-------
 Rand  GM.   1980.  Detection:bioassay.   Pages  390-403.   In:  Guthrle FE  &
 Perry JJ.,  eds.  Introduction to  Environmental  Toxicology.   Elsevier North
 Holland, Inc., N.Y. 484 pp.

 Schlndler JE,  Waide  JB, Waldron  MC, Mains  JJ, Schreiner SP, Freeman  ML,
 Beng  SL,  Pettigrew  DR, Schissel  LA,  &  Clark  PJ.    1980.   A  microcosm
 approach  to   the  study   of  biogeochemical   systems.    I  Theoretical
 rationale,  pp.  192-203.   In: JP  Giesy, Jr.  ed.  Microcosms  in  Ecological
 Research, CONF-781101.   U.S. Department  of Energy, Technical  Information
 Center.

 Snedecor GW  &  Cochran  WG.   1980.  Statistical  Methods.   7th  Edition.
 Iowa  State  University Press, Ames,  Iowa.

 Sokal  RR 4  Rohlf  FJ.   1981.   Biometry:   The  principles and practice of
 statistics   in  biological    research  2nd   Edition.    W.   H.  Freeman  and
 Company, San  Francisco, CA.

 Steele  RDG &  Torrie  BH.   1980.  Principals  and  Procedures  of  Statistics
 2nd      Edition.     McGraw-Hill     Book      Co.,     N.Y.      481     pp.
 Swann  RL, Laskowski DA,  McCall  PJ, Vander  Kuy  K, & Dishburger  HJ.   1983.
 A  rapid method  for  the   estimation  of   the  environmental   parameters
 octanol/water partition coefficient,  soil  sorption constant, water  to air
 ratio, and water solubility.  Residue Reviews.  85:17-28.

 Tolle  DA, Arthur MF,  Van  Voris  P, Feder PI,  Matthews  MC,  Chesson J,
 Larson  ME,  &  Zwick TC.  1982.   Evaluation  of  terrestrial  microcosms  for
 environmental  studies  of  utility wastes.   Third  Ann.  Prog.  Rep.   on RP
 1224-5    to    Electric    Power   Research   Institute,   Palo   Alto,   CA.
                                     -35-
Th" $ document is In process of development and Is for ASTM coa»ittee ute only.  It shall not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted,  in whole or in part, outside of ASTM conwittee
activities except with the approval of  the chairman of the coawitte* with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
  Tolle DA, Arthur  MF  & Van Vorls  P.   1983.  Microcosm/field comparison of
  trace element uptake  in crops  grown  in fly  ash-amended  soil.   Sci.  Tot.
  Environ.  31:  243-261.

  Van  Voris P,  O'Neill  RV, Emanuel  WR,  & Shugart  Jr,  HH.  1980.  Functional
  complexity and ecosystem stability.   Ecology  61(6):1352-1360.

  Van  Yoris  P, Arthur  MF, &  Tolle DA.   1982.   Evaluation  of terrestrial
  microcosms for  assessing  ecological  effects  of utility  wastes.   EPRI
  Publication No. EA-2364.  Electric  Power Research  Institute,  Palo Alto,
  CA.  pp.  178.

  Van  Voris P, Arthur  MF, Tolle  DA, Morris JP, & Larson M.   1983.   Use of
  microcosms for monitoring nutrient cycling processes in agroecosystems. p.
  171-182.   In:  R.  Lowrance,  R. Todd, L.  Asmussen, and  R.  Leonard (eds.)
  Nutrient  Cycling in Agricultural Ecosystems.   University of Ga. College of
  Agric.  Exp.  Station,  Spec.  Pub. 23. Tifton, GA.

  Van   Voris  P,   Tolle   DA,   Arthur  MF,  Chesson  J,  &  Zwick  TC.   1984.
  Development  and  validation  of  terrestrial   microcosm  test  system  for
  assessing ecological  effects  of  utility wastes.   Final   Project  Report
  RP1224-5.    EPRI   Publication   No.   EA-3672.    Electric   Power  Research
  Institute, Palo  Alto,  CA. pp. 185.

  Van  Voris  P,  Tolle  DA, Arthur   MF,  &  Chesson  J.   1985.   Terrestrial
  Microcosms:  validation, applications, and cost-benefit analysis.
  pp 117-142  In:  J  Cairns, Jr.  ed.  Multispecies  Toxicity Testing. Pergamon
  Press,  New York.

  Walters.  DB.  (ed)   1980.  Safe Handling of Chemical  Carcinogens, Mutagens,
  Teratogens and  Highly  Toxic  Substances.   Volumes  I  and   II.   Ann Arbor
  Science Publishers Inc., Ann Arbor Michigan.   652 pp.
	                         -36-
rnis document is in process of development and Is for ASTM comnittee use only.  It shall  not
be reproduced or circulated or quoted,  1n whole or In part, outside of ASTM cowMttee
activities except with the approval of  the chairman of the committee with jurisdiction or
th« President of the Society.

-------
 Wang,  CH  and  DL  W1THs.    1965.   Radlotracer  Methodology  in  Biological
 Sciences.   Prentice-Hall,  Inc.   Englewood  Cliffs, New  Jersey.  382  pp.


 Zwick  TC,  Arthur MF, Tolle DA, & Van  Voris P.   1984.  A  unique laboratory
 method  for  evaluating  agro-ecosystem  effects   of  an  industrial   waste
 product.  Plant  Soil. 77:  395-399.
-37-
                                 shall not
TM» document is in process of development «nd it for ASTH eowittee use only.  It sh
be reproduced or circulated or quoted, in whole or in part, outside of AST* committee
activities except irlth the approval  of the chairwan of the coanittee with jurisdiction or
the President of the Society.

-------
                                APPENDIX B

    A noninclusive list of sample sources of biological materials for

enclosed species tests

    1.  Ward's Natural Science Establishment, Inc.
        11850 E. Florence Ave.
        Santa Fe Springs, CA.   90670-4490

    2.  Harris Moran  Seed Co.
        1155 Harkins  Rd.
        Salinas, CA.   93901

    3.  Carolina Biological  Supply Co.
        Burlington, North Carolina  27215

    4.  California Department  Food and  Agriculture
        Biological Control Services  Program
        Sacramento, CA.   95832
                                   150

-------
                                                                                    -1-
         Life-Cycle  Characteristics  of  Non-Target  Terrestrial Organisms
                for Testing Microbial Pest-Control  Agents
                             Prepared by L.K.  Etzel
System
   A.  Amblyseius hibisci
      1.  Length of life  cycle:
            Egff - Egg:  11  days @ 25.5'C;  6C% R.H.
                 «
      2.  Immature stage:
            Type of foodr  Pollen of  oak,  magnolia, cattail, Mesembryanthemum spp.;
                            Panonychus citri  (citrus red mite);
                            Oligonychus punicae  (brown almond mite)
            Quantity:
      5.  Adult:
            Type of food:   Same
            Quantity:  Ovipositing female  eata  3 to 8 adult 0_. punicae per day
            Longevity:  X ovi positional period  = 19.6 days
            Fecundity:  Ca.  2 eggs/female/day;  Total ca. 40 eggs
      4.  Other notes:
  B.  Panonychus citri
      1.  Length of life cycle:
            Egg - Adult:  14 days @ 2J.9*C; 65% R.H.; on lemon fruit
                          33 days @ 15.6"C; 6596 R.H.; on lemon fruit
      2.  Immature stage:
            Type of food:  Citrus seedlings or lemon fruit
            Quantity:
      3w  Adult
            Type of food:  Same
            Quantity:
            Longevity:  23 days @ 23.9'C; 65% R.H.; on lemon fruit
                        36 days @ 15.6*C; 65% R.H.; on lemon fruit
            Fecundity:  Total ca. 36 eggs 0 23.9*0 as above
                        Total ca. 50 eggs @ 15.6'C as above
      4.  Other notes:
  C.  References
      1.  Davis et al. (1979)

-------
                                                                                     -2.
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics  (con't)
System #1 Ccon't)
       2.
       3.
       4.
       5.
       6.
       7.
       8.
       9.
      10.
Kennett and Hamai  (1980)
McMurtry (1970)
McMtortry and Johnson  1966
McMurtry and Scriven  1964
McMurtry and Scriven  1965
McMurtry and Scriven  1966
McMurtry, Huffaker, and van de Vrie (1970)
Monger (1963)
van de .Vrie, McMurtry, and Hnffaker (1972)

-------
                                                                                    -3-
                       Life-Cycle Characteristics  (con't)
System #2
   A.   Metaaeiulus  occidental is
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg -  Adult:  6.3 days ® 24* C
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Tetranychus urticae (two—spotted mite)
                            T. pacificus (Pacific  spider mite)
                            Various other Tetranychid mites
             Quantity:   16-17 mite eggs during development
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:   Ovipositing female eats ca.  11  small two-spotted mite
                        nymphs/day
             Longevity:   X ovipositional period =17.3  days
             Fecundity:   Ca. 2 eggs/female/day; Total ca.  35 eggs
       4.  Other notes:
   B.  Tetranychus urticae
       1.   Length of  life cycle:
             Egg - Egg:   19  days  @ 20.3'C;  15.5 hr.  light/day
       2.   Immature stage:
             Type of  food:  Attacks an extremely wide host  range of plants
             Quantity:
       3.   Adult:
             Type of  food:  Same
             Quantity i
             Longevity:   18  days  @ 20.3'C
             Fecundity:   Ca. 2.4  eggs/female/day; Total ca. 38 eggs
       4*   Other notes:
   C.  References
          Davis et al., (1979)
          Kennett and Hamai  (1980)
          McMurtry and  Scriven (19^5)
          McMurtry, Huffaker,  and van  de Vrie (1970)
          van de Vrie,  McMurtry,  and Huffaker (1972)
  8
(0.
 11.   IgliMky and Rainwater (1954)
 12.   Lfting (1969)
                           (1970

-------
                                                                                    -4-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #1
   A.  Phytoseiulus persi'milis
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  3.8 days @ 30'C
                           4.6 days @ 25'C
                           7.4 days @ 20'C
       2.  Immattote stage:
             Type of food!  Tetranychua -urticae (two-spotted spider mite)
             Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity*  Ovipositing female eats ca. 3 adtilfr female two-spotted
                        mites/day or ca. 34 mite eggs
             Longevity:  X ovipositional period ca. 14 days @ 26*0
             Fecundity:  Ca. 4 eggs/female/day; Total ca. 54 eggs
       4.  Other notes:
   B.  Tetranychus urticae
       See info under System #2.

   C.  References
       Same as for System #2.

-------
                                                                                    -5-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics  (con't)
System #4
   A.  Geocorla  punctities (big-eyed bug)
      1.   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  34 days @ 26.7*C  (incl.  ca. 9 days in the egg stage)
      2.   Immature  stage:
             !Iype «of food:  Lygus bugs, spider mi tea, aphids, leafhoppers, and
                            moth eggs and larvae
             Quantity:  20-30 moth eggs/day/nymph
      3.   Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:  50 - 60 moth eggs/day/adult
             Longevity:   Female ca. 68 days  @ 25»5"C
                         Male ca. 42  days @  25.5"C
             Fecundity:   Ca. 3.6 eggs/female/day; Total ca. 75 eggs @ 23.9*C (20& hatch)
                         Ca. 7.2 eggs/female/day; Total ca. 126 eggs 0 26.7*C (4956 hatch)
      4.   Other notes:
   B.   Trichoplusia ni (cabbage looper)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
            Egg - Adult: 20 - 21  days @ 28*C (incl.  1J - 14 days in the larval stage)
       2.  Immature stage:
            Type of food:   A variety of plants,  including cabbage, turnip, lettuce,
                            pea, and cotton;  artificial diet.
            Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
            Type of food:   Sugar water
            Quantity:
            Longevity:   Ca.  8 days
            Fecundity:  X = ca. 400 eggs
       4.  Other notes:
   C.  References
     14.  Champlain and Sholdt (1967)
     15.  Cohen (1981)
     16.  Cohen (1985)
     17.  Cohen and Debolt  (1983)

-------
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)

System #4 Ccon't)
      18.  Dunbar and Bacon
      19.  Duribar and Bacon (1972b)
      20.  Guy et al.(l985)

-------
                                                                                    -7-
                      Life-Cycle  Characteristics  (con't)
System #5
   A.   Chrysonerla carnea (green  lacewing)
       1.   Length  of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  24  - 27  days 0 26.7'C;  75% R.H.  (incl. 15-16 days as larva)
       2.   Immature stage:
             Type tof food:  Principally aphids  and moth eggs and young larvae
             Quantity:   Ca. 30 -  40 mg moth eggs/larva; ca. 80 mg aphids/larva
       3.   Adult:
             Type  of
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   80 -  82  days  @ 20*C &  8096 R.H. with proper food
             Fecundity:   Depends  on food;   artificial diet - ca. 890 eggs over 75
                         days;  honey  - 32  eggs over  46 days
       4.   Other notes:   Rearing  must  be  conducted with at least 14 hr. of light
                         per day  to prevent diapause.
   B.  Acvrthosiphon  pisxim (pea aphid)
      1.  Length of  life  cycle:
            Kymph -  Nymph:  9-10  days 0 21*C
      2.  Immature stage:
            Type of  food:  Pava bean plants;(alfalfa^ other legumes
            Quantity:
      3.  Adult:
            Type of  food:  Same
            Quantity:
            Longevity:  Estimate  10 days
            Fecundity:  Ca. 9 nymphs/female/day;  ca. 90 nymphs total
      4.  Other notes:


   C.  References:
     (1)  Davis et al..(l979)
     21.  Canard et  al. (1984)
     22.  Forbes et  al. (1985)
     23.  Morrison (I985a)

-------
                                                                                    -8-
                      Life—Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #6
   A.  Hi-p-podamia convergens (convergent ladybird beetle)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  17 days @ 26*0 (incl. ca. 9 days as larva)
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of foodv   Aphids
             Quantity: Estimate 15 mg/larva/day; or 140 - 170 mg/larval stage
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:  Estimate 25 mg/adult/day; or ca. 1350 mg/adnlt stage
             Fectmdity:  Ca. 1270 eggs; ca.  25 eggs/female/day
             Longevity:  X = 60 days @ 22.8*0
       4.  Other notes:  Bearing should be conducted with at least 11 hours of light.
   B.  Acyrthosi-phon. pisum
       See info under System #5.
   0.  References:
      (1)  Davis et al. (1979)
     (22)  Porbes et al. (1965)
      24.  Clausen (1916)
      25.  Hagen (1962)
      26.  Hagen and Sluss (1966)
      27.  Simpson and Burkhardt (i960)

-------
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)

System -#7

   A.   Olla abdominalis (ashy-gray ladybird beetle)

       1.  Length of life cycle:

             Egg - Adult:  15 days 0 26'C (incl. 8 days as larva)

       2.  Immature stage:

             Type ,of. food:  Aphids

             Quantity:  Estimate 15 ing/larva/day; or 125 ug/larval stage

       3.  Adult:

             Type of food:  Same

             Quantity:  Estimate 15 mg/adult/day; or ca. 675 ing/adult stage

             Longevity:  Estimate 45 days

             Fecundity:  Ca. 295 eggs; ca. 8 eggs/female/day

       4.  Other notes:
   B.   Acyrthosi-ahon pi sum

       See info under System #5.
   C.  References:
      (1
      22
      24
      25
      27
Bivis et al. (1979)
Forbes et al. (1985)
Clausen
Hagen
Simpson and Burkhardt (i960)

-------
                                                                                    -10-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #8
   A.  Cryptolaemus montrouaieri (mealybug destroyer)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  28 - 29 days @ 26.7*C (incl. ca. 15 days as larva)
                           43 - 47 days 0 21.1*0 (incl. oa. 25 days as larva)
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Mealybugs
             Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  X = 51 days @ 25"C
             Fecundity:  Ca. 440 eggs; ca. 9 eggs/female/day @ 25*C
       4.  Other Notes:
   B.'  Pseudocoecus citri (citrus mealybug)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
              Egg - Adult:  Estimate 4-5 weeks © ca. 21.1'C
       2.  Immature stage:
             l^pe of food:  Vide host range of plants;  especially severe on citrus
             Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  Estimate 4 weeks
             Fecundity:  Ca. 300 - 500 eggs
       4.  Other notes:
   C.   References:
      28.   Fisher (1963)

-------
                                                                                   -11
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics  (con't)
System #9
   A.  Trichogramma. spp.  (parasites of insect  eggs)
      1.   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  8-10 days 0 26.?*C;  80# R.H.; continuous light
      2.   Immature stage:
             Type °f food:  Primarily attack eggs of lepidopterans
             Quantity:   1-2 parasites/egg
      3.   Adult z
             Typ* of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:
             Fecundity:   Less than 100 eggs
      4*   Other notes:


   B.  Qatrinia nubilalis (European corn borer)
      1,   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  21  - 28 days @ 27*C;  75 - 8C$ R.H.; contirruoxis light
                            (incl.  13-19 days as larva)
      2.   Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Vide host range, including corn, potatoes, beans,
                            celery, etc.; artificial diet
             Quantity:
      3.   Adult:
             T^pe of food: Water
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   12 days
             Fecundity:   X = 300 eggs/female
      4*   Other notes:
  C.  References:
     29.  Burbutis and  Goldstein (1983)
     30.  Guthrie et al.  (1985)
     31.  Morrison (l985b)

-------
                                                                                   -12-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #10
   A.  Anaphea flavipes (egg parasite of cereal leaf beetle)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  8-9 days @ 30*C;  80-$ R.H.
       2.  Immature stage;
             Type of food:  Eggs of cereal leaf beetle
             Quantity:  3+ parasites/egg
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  4-5 days @ 21 *C; 8O$ H.H.
             Fecundity: Ca. 21 eggs/female
       4*  Other notes:
   B.  Oulema melanopua (cereal leaf beetle)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:
             Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
             Cfype of food:
             Quantity:
             Longevity:
             Fecundity:
       4*  Other notes:
   C.  References:
      32.   Anderson and  Paschke  (1968)

-------
                      Life-Cycle  Characteristics  (con't)
Sstem
   A.   Aphidiua  ervi  (parasite  of pea aphid)
       1.   Length  of  life  cycle:
             Egg - Adult:   Ca.  14 days © 21.1*0; 55% R.H.
       2.   Immature stage:
             Type ,of  food:  Pea aphids
             Quantity:   1  parasite/aphid
       3.   Adult:
             Type  of  food:  Honeydew or  honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  8-10 days @ 21.1*0
             Fecundity:  Ca. 50 adult progeny/female with large-scale rearing
       4.   Other notes:
  B.  Acyrthosiphon pisum
      See info under System #5,
   C.  References:
    (22)  Forbes et al.  (1985)
     33.  Fox et al.  (19*7)
     34*  Quezada (unpubl.)

-------
                                                                                    -14.
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #12.
   A.  Diaretiella rapae (parasite of green peach aphid and cabbage aphid)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  10.4 days @ 25*0
                           14.7 days 0 20'C
                           20.2 days 0 15'C
       2.  Immature stage:
             type of foodii  Green peach aphids or cabbage aphids
             Quantity:  1 parasite/aphid
       3.  Adult:
             type of food:  Honeydew or honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Maximum of 6 days @ ca. 19*0
             Fecundity:   Ca. 230 progeny/female
       4.  Other notes:
   B.   Brevicorynae brassicae (cabbage aphid)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Nynph - IJymph:   Estimate 10-14 days @ 21.1*0
       2,  Immature stage:
             type of food:  Wide  variety of cole plants,  including cabbage,  collards,
                            and rape
             Quantity:
       3.  Mult: .  •
             type of food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Ca. 30 days in nature in summer
             Fecundity:   Ca. 80 - 100 nymphs
       4.  Other notes:
   C.   References:
     (22)   Forbes et al.  (1985)
      35.   Hagen and van  den Bosch (1968)
      36.   Simpson  et al. (1975)

-------
                                                                                   -15-
                      Life—Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #13
   A.   Lysiphlebus testaceipes (parasite of greenbug)
       1.   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  11.1  days @ 21  - 32*C
                           10.8 days @ 27'C
                           13.2 days @ 21*C
       2.   Immature stage:
                  *
             Type of food:  Greenbugs
             Quantity:  1 parasite/aphid
       3.   Adult:
             Type of food:  Eoneydew or honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  2-3 days @ 23.3*0
             Fecundity:
       4.   Other notes:  The parasite is not active at temperatures below 18.3'C,
                         but the greenbug can reproduce at temperatures as low as
                         4.4'C.
   B.   Schizatihis  grannnuin (greenbug)
       1.   Length  of life cycle:
             Nymph - Nymph:  6 days @ 26.7"C
                             9 days @ 21.1*0
                            15 days @ 15.6*C
       2.   Immature stage:
             Type  of food:  Wheat,  barley,  oats,  rye, and sorghum
             Quantity:
       3.   Adult:
             Type  of food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Ca.  20 days @ 22.2*C
             Fecundity:   Ca.  100  nymphs/female
       4.   Other notes:
   C.  References:
    (22)  Forbes et  al.  (1985)
     37.  Headlee  (1914)
     38.  Hight et al.  (1972)
     39.  Starks and Burton  (1977)

-------
                                                                                    -16-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #14
   A.  Cotesia (sApanteles) melano3celTi3 (parasite of gypsy moth)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  Ca. 15 days @ 23*C; 4<$ R.H.; 18 hr. light daily
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Larvae of gypsy moths
             Quantity:  1 parasite/larva
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  At least 2-3 weeks
             Fecundity:  Ca. 100 progeny/female
       4.  Other notes:


   B.  Lyaantria dispar (gypsy moth)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult: Ca. 40-44 days @ 25*C; 50 - 6096 R.H.; 16 hr. light daily
       2.  Immature stage;
             Type of food:  Foliage of over 300 species of trees and shrubs, expecially
                            oaks; artificial diet
             Quantity:  Ca. 10 ml diet per larva
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  None
             Quantity: N/A
             Longevity:  Males =3-5 days; females =2-3 days
             Fecundity:  Ca. 900 eggs/female
       4.  Other notes:
   C.  References:
      40.  Chianese (1985)
      41.  ODell et al. (1985)

-------
                                                                                   -17-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics  (con't)
System #15
   A.   Hetaphycus helvolua (parasite of black scale)
       1.   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  13 days 0 27.8*0
       2.   Immature stage:
             lype of food:  Black scale
             Quantity:  1 parasite/scale
       3.   Adult:
             TVpe of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   50 days Q 26.7"C,  if fed honey; but can live much longer
                         with cool temperatures and host feeding
             Fecundity:   Ca. 400 eggs/female
       4.   Other-notes:
  B.   Saisaetia oleae  (black scale)
       1.  Length of  life  cycle:
             Egg - Adult:   ?0 - 90  days @ 21"C
       2.  Immature stage:
             *Eype of  food:  Wide  host  plant range among the ornamentals; can be
                           severe  pest of citrus and oliv>_
             Quantity:
       3.  Adult:
             Type  of  food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  Estimate 1 month @ 21' C
             Fecundity:  1,000 -  4,000 eggs
       4.  Other notes:
  C.  References:
     42.  Clausen (1978)
     43.  Flanders (1942)

-------
                                                                                    -18-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #16
   A.  Aphytia. lingnanensis (parasite of California red scale)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Mult:  Ca.  15 days © 27'C;  60# R.H.
                               17 days @ 26*C;  6C# R.H.
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type'of food:  California red scale;  oleander scale (in lab)
             Quantity:  2'JOT more parasites/scale
       3.  Mult:
             lype of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Ca. 10 days @ 26*C;  60$ R.H.
             Fecundity:   Ca. 5-6 eggs/day;  ca. 57 eggs/female total on red scale;
                         more than twice this number on oleander scale;  each female
                         destroys ca. an additional 46 scales by predation
       4.  Other notes:
   B.  Aspidiotis nerii (oleander scale)
       1.   Length of life cycle:
             Crawler - Crawler:   60 days © 25*C;  50 - 6C% R.H.
       2.   Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Oleander plants; banana squash or butternut pumpkins
             Quantity:
       3.   Adult:
             Type of food:  Same
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  10-14  days
             Fedundity:  X = 94 crawlers/female
       4.   Other notes:
   C.   References:
      44.   DeBach and White  (1960)
      45.   Papacek  and Smith (1985)

-------
                                                                                    -15-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #17
   A.   Brachymeria intermedia (parasite of gypsy moth and many other lepidopterans)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  15 - 30 days @ 24*C
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Larvae in several lepidopterous families
             Quantity:  1 parasite/larva
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Honey
             Quantity:
             Longevity:  4-6 weeks @ 24* - 27*C under forced lab prod.;  150 days
                         @ 21* - 24*C with honey and water and no hosts
             Fecundity:  Ca. 300 progeny/female
       4.  Other-notes:


   B.   'Priehoplusia ni (cabbage looper)
       See info under System #4.
   C.   References:
     (20)   Guy et al. (1935)
      46.   King and Hartley (1985a)
      47.   Palmer (1985)

-------
                                                                                   -20-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #18
   A.  Lixophaga diatraeaeslfly parasite on sugarcane borer)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  18.2 - 20.9 days @ 26'C;  80# H.H.
       2.  immature stage:
             Type ^of food:  Larvae of the sugarcane  borer and of the greater wax
                            moth (lab only)
             Quantity:  1 'parasite/larva
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food;  Raw brown sugar
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Female = ca. 24 days @ 26* C
                         Male- = ca. JO days
             Fecundity:   Peak fecundity = 78 maggots in uterus on 12th day
       4.  Other notes:
   B.  Diatraea saccharalis (sugarcane borer)
       1.  Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:  36 - J8 days @ 26*0
       2.  Immature stage:
             Type of food:  Sugarcane or grain sorghum;  artificial  diet  in lab
             Quantity:   Artificial diet - ca.  3.3 ml/larva
                        Grain sorghum stalk -  1.5"/larva
                        Sugarcane tops - ca. 15 gm/larva
       3.  Adult:
             Type of food:  Water
             Quantity:
             Longevity:   Ca. 7 .days @ 26*C
             Fecundity:   435 eggs/female @ 26*C
                         730 eggs/female @ 24*C
       4.  Other notes:
   C.   References:
     (46)   King and Hartley (l985a)
      48.   King and Hartley (l985b)
      49.   King and Hartley (1985c)
      50.   King and Martin (1975)

-------
                                                                                   -21
                     Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)
System #18 (con't)

     51.  King et al.  (1975!
     52.  King et al.  (1975'
     53.  King et al.  (1979,
     54.  Miles and King  (1975)
     55.  Pan and Long (1961)
     56.  Wongsiri and Randolph (1962)

-------
                                                                                    -22-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)

System #19
   A.  Apis mellifera (honeybee)

       1.   Adult:
             type  of food:  Honey, pollen,  and water

             Quantity:

             Longevity:  Foragers live ca.  3 weeks in nature; what would happen in
                         a caged environment is unpredictable.  Freshly emerged bees
                         i£E@0 the brood comb should live the longest (at least a.
                         month in the proper conditions) but may need to be fed pollen
                         in addition to honey.  There should be at least 50 bees
                         placed in a microcosm so they can aggregate to maintain
                         suitable environmental conditions.

-------
                                                                                   -23-
                      Life-Cycle Characteristics (con't)

System #20

   A.   Vanessa cardui (Painted lady butterfly)

       1.   Length of life cycle:
             Egg - Adult:
                Egg - ca. 1 week in nature in summer
                Larva - ca. 1 month in nature in summer
                Pupa - ca. 2 weeks in nature in summer
                Total - ca. 7 weeks
           Immature stage j
             Type of food:
                 Can feed on over 100 spp. of plants (chiefly  in the
                 Malvaceae, Compositae, Leguminosae);  plants include
                 thistles (a favorite), burdock, sunflowers, nettles;
                 can be a serious pest at times on maize,  alfalfa, beans,
                 sunflowers, and soybeans.  Artificial diets available.
             Quantity:
           Adult:
       4.
  Type of food:
  Quantity:

  Longevity:  Ho info found, but should be quite long-lived because  of
              potential for migration.

  Fecundity:

Other notes:
   B.   References:
      57.  Brooks and Knight (1982)
      58.  Singh (1985)
      59.  Williams, C.B. (197°)

-------
                                                                                     -24-
                     Proposed Non-Target Terrestrial Organisms
                     for Testing Hierobial Pest Control Agents
                              (Revised Bibliography)

                              Prepared by L.Z. Etzel

 I.  General Beferences

     A,  Bezark, L.G. and H. Tee
           t985.  1985 Suppliers of Beneficial Organisms in North America.  California
                  Department of Pood and Agriculture, Biological Control Services
                  Program,' ,3288 Meadowview Roady "Sacramento, CA 95852.  6 pp.

     B.  Dickerson, W.A., J.D. Hoffman, E.G. King, N.C. Leppla, and T.M. ODell
           1979.  Arthropod Species in Culture in the United States and Other
                  Countries.  Entomological Society of ^SeTica, College Park, HD. 93 PP.

     C.  Singh, P. and R.P. Moore (eds.)
           1985.  Handbook of Insect Rearing.  Volumes I and II.  Elsevier, New
                  York.  488 pp. 4 514 PP.

II.  Specific References

     System #1
     1.  Davis, D.W., S.C. Hoyt, J.A. McMurtry, and M.T. AliNiazee (eds.)
           1979.  Biological Control and Insect Pest Management.  University of
                  California Press, Berkeley.  102 pp.

     2.  Kennett, C.E. and J. Hamai
           1980.  Oviposition and development in predaceous mites fed with artificial
                  and natural diets (Acari:Phytoseiidae).  Ent. Exp. Appl., 28;116-
                  122.

     3.  McMurtry, J.A.
           1970«  Some factors of foliage condition limiting population growth of
                  Oligonychus -punicae (AcarinatTetranychidae).  Ann. Entomol. Soc.
                  Amer.. 631406-412.

    • 4.  McMurtry, J.A. and E.G. Johnson
           1966.  An ecological study of the spider mite Oligonychus punicae (Hirst)
                  and—its natural enemies.  Hilgardia, 37;363-400.
                                         •
     5.  McMurtry, J.A, and G.T. Scriven
           1964.  Studies on the feeding, reproduction, and development of Amblvseiua
                  hibisci (Acarina:Phytoseiidae) on various food substances.  Ann.
                  Entomol. Soc. Amer., 57t649-655.

     6.  McMurtry, J.A. and G.T. Scriven
           1965.  Insectary production of phytoseiid mites.  Jour. Econ. Entomol.,
                  5J3:282-284.

     7.  McMurtry, J.A. and G.T. Scriven
           1966.  The influence of pollen and prey density on the number of prey
                  consumed by Amblyseius hibisci (Acarina:Phytoseiidae).  Ann.
                  Entomol. Soc. Aaer., 59:147-149*

-------
                                                                                 -2C
 8.  McMurtry, J.A., C.B. Huffaker, and M. van de Vrie
       1970.  Ecology of Tetranychid mites and their natural enemies: A review.
              I.  Tetranychid enemies: Their biological characters and the inpact
              of spray practices.  Hilgardia, 40:331-390.

 9.  Munger, P.
       1963.  Factors affecting growth and multiplication of the citrus red mite,
              Panonychtia citri,  Ann. Entomol. Soc. Am., 56:867-874.

10.  van de Vrie, M., J.A. McMurtry, and C.B. Euffaker
       1972.  Ecology of Tetranychid mites and their natural enemies: A review.
              HI.  Biology, ecology, and pest status, and host-plant relations
              of tetranychids.  Hilgardia, 4^:343-432.

System #2

References 1, 2, 6, 8, 10

11.  Iglinsky, W., Jr., and C.F. Rainwater
       1954.  Life history and habits of Tetranychus desertorua and bimaculatus
              on cotton.  Jour. Econ. Entonol., 47t1084-1006.

12.  Laing, J.E.                                       :
       1969.  Life history and life table of Tetranychus •qrticae Koch.
              Acarologia, 9j 32-42.

13.  Scriven, G.T. and J.A. McMurtry
       1971.  Quantitative production and processing of Tetranychid mites for
              large-scale testing or predator production.  Jour. Econ. Entomol.,
              64:1255-1257.

System #3
References 1, 2, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13

System #4
14.  Champlain, R.A. and L.L. Sholdt
       1967.  Life history of Geocoris punetipes (Hemiptera:Lygaeidae) in the
              laboratory.  Annals Entomol. Soc. Amer., 60:881-883.

15.  Cohen, A.C.
       1981.  An artificial diet for Geocoris puncti-pes (Say).  Southwest.
              Entoaiol., 6_:109-113.   '

16.  Cohen, A.C.
       1985.  Simple method for rearing the insect predator Geocoris punctrpes
              (Heteroptera:Lygaeidae) on a meat diet.  Jour. Econ. Entomol.,
              78:1173-1175.

17.  Cohen, A.C. and J.W. DeBolt
       1983.  Rearing Geocoris -punctipes on insect eggs.  Southwest. Entomol.,
              8.: 61-64.

18.  Dunbar, D.M. and O.G. Bacon
       1972a. Feeding, development, and reproduction of Geocoris punctipes
              (Heteroptera:Lygaeidae) on eight diets.  Ann. Entomol. Soc. Aner.,
              65:892-895.

-------
                                                                                 -26-
19.  Dunbar, D.M. and O.G. Bacon
       1972b. Influence of temperature on development  and reproduction of
              Geocoris atricolor, G. pallens,  and G. punetipes  (Heteroptera:
              Lygaeidae) from California.  Envir.  Entomol., j.:596-599.

20..  Guy, R.H., N.C. Leppla, and J.R. Rye
       1995.  Trichoplusia ni.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh and
              R.F. Moore, eds.)f Vol. II, pp.  487-494.   ELsevier, New York, 514 pp.

System #5
Reference 1

21.  Canard, M. Y. Semeria, and T.R. New (eds.)
       1984.  Biology of Chrysopidae.  Dr W. Junk Publishers, Boston.  294 pp.

22.  Forbes, A.R., B.D. Frazer, and O.K. Chan
       1985.  Aphida.  In "Handbook of Insect  Rearing" (P. Singh and H.P. Moore,
              eds.), Vol. I, pp. 353-359-  ELsevier, New York,  488 pp.

23.  Morrison, R.K.
       1985a. Chrysopa carnea.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P.Singh and
              H.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 419-426,  ELsevier, New York, 488 pp.

System #6

References 1, 22

24.  Clausen, C.P.
       1916.  Life-history and feeding records of a series of California
              Coccinellidae.  Calif. Univ. Pub. Entomol.,  1.:251-29.9.

25.  Hagen, K.S.
       1962.  Biology and ecology of predaceous Coccinellidae.   Annu. Rev.
              Entomol., J_:289-326.

26.  Hagen, K.S. and R.R. Sluss
       1966.  Quantity of aphids required for  reproduction by HiTipodamia spp. in
              the laboratory.  Pp. 47-59.  In  "Ecology of Aphidophagous Insects"
              (I. Hodek, ed.), Dr. W. Junk, Publ., The Hague, Netherlands, 360 pp.

27.  Simpson, R.G. and C.C. Burkhardt
       1960.  Biology and evaluation t>f certain predators of Therioa-phis maculata
              (Buckton).  Jour. Econ. Entomol., 53:89-94.

Svsten #7

References 1, 22, 24, 25, 27

System "#8

28.  Fisher, T.W.
       1963.  Mass culture of Cryptolaemus and Letitomastix. natural enemies  of
              citrus mealybug.  Calif. Agr. Expt.  Stn. Bull., 757;39.

-------
                                                                                 -27-
System #9

29.  Burbutis, P.P. and L.P. Goldstein
       1983.  Mass rearing Tricho gramma nubilale  on European corn borer, its
              natural host.  Protection Ecology,  £:269-275.

30.  Guthrie, W.D., J.C. Bobbins, and J.L.  Jarvis
       1985.  Ostrinia nubilalis.   In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh and
              R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp.  407-413.  Elsevier, New York, 514 pp.

31.  Morrison, R.K.
       1985"b. TJrichograrmtfi spp.  In "Handbook  of  Insect Rearing" (p. Singh
              and H.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp.  413-417, Elsevier, New York.
              408 pp.

System
32.  Anderson, B.C. and J.D. Paschke
       1968.  The biology and  ecology of  Anaphea  flavipes  (HymenopterarMymaridae),
              an exotic egg parasite  of the  cereal leaf beetle.  Ann. Entomol.
              Soc. Amer., 61 ;1-5.

System
Reference 22

33.  Pox, P.M., B.C. Pass, and R.  Thurston
       1967-  laboratory studies on  the rearing of Anhidius smithi (Hymenoptera:
              Braconidae) and its  parasitism of Acyrthosiphon pisxun (Homoptera:
              Aphididae).  Ann. Entomol.  Soc.  Amer., 60; 1083-1 087.

34.  Quezada, J.
       unpubl.  Notes on rearing Acyrtho s i ph on pisxtm and Aphidius ervi.

System #12

Reference 22

35.  Hagen, Z.S. and R. van den Bosch
       1968.  Impact of pathogens, parasites,  and predators on aphids.  Arum.
              Rev. Entomol., 13.: 325-384.

36.  Simpson, B.A., W.A. Shands, and G.W. Simpson
       1975.  Mass rearing of the  parasites Praon sp. and Diaretiella rapae.
              Ann. Itatomol. Soc. Am., 68; 257-2 60.

System
Reference 22

37.  Headlee, T.J.
       1914.  Some data on the  effect  of temperature  and moisture on  the rate
              of insect metabolism.  Jour.  Scon.  Entomol., 2.5413-417.

38.  Hight, S.C., R.D. Eikenbary, R.J. Miller,  and K.J. Starks
       1972.  The greenbug and  Lysiphlebus  testacei-pea.  Environ. Entomol.,
              1:205-209.

-------
                                                                                 -28-
39.  Starks, K.J. and R.L. Burton
       1977.  Greenbugs: determining biotypes.  USDA-ARS Tech. Bull., 1536:12.

System #14
40.  Chianese, R.
       1985.  Cotesia melanoscelus.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh
              and R.F. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 395-400, Elsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

41.  ODell, T.M., C.A. Butt, and A.W. Bridgeforth
       1985.  Lymytria dispar.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh and
              H.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 355-367 t Elsevier, New York, 514 pp.

System
42.  Clausen, C.P. (ed.)
       1978.  Introduced parasites and predators of arthropod pests and weeds t
              A world review.  TTSDA Agric. Handbook No. 480, 545 pp.

43.  Planders, S.E.
       1942.  Metaphyeus helvolus, an encyrtid parasite of the black scale.
              Jour. Econ. Entomol., 35:690-698.

System #16

44.  DeBach, P. and E.B. White
       1960.  Commercial mass culture of the California red scale parasite
              Aphytis lingnanenais.  Calif. Agric. Exp. Stn. Bull. No. 770, 58pp.

45.  Papacek, D.F. and D. Smith
       1985.  Aphytis lingnanensis.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
              and R.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 373-381, Elsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

System
Reference 20

46.  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985a. Galleria mellonella.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh
              and R.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 301-305, Elsevier, New York,
              514 PP.

47.  Palmer, D.J.
       1985.  Brachymeria intermedia.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (P. Singh
              and R.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. I, pp. 383-393 , Elsevier, New York,
              488 pp.

System #18

Reference 46

48.  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985b. Lixophaga diatraeae.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh
              and R.P. Moore, eds.), Vol. II, pp. 119-123, Elsevier, New York,
              514 PP.

-------
                                                                                 -2?-
49.  King, E.G. and G.G. Hartley
       1985c. Diatraea saccharalis.  In "Handbook of Insect Rearing" (p. Singh
              and R.P. Moore,  eds.), Vol. II, pp. 265-270, ELsevier, New York,
              5H PP.

50.  King, E.G. and D.F. Martin
       1975.  Lixophaga diatraeae; Development at different constant temperatures.
              Environ. Entomol., 4_: 329-332.

51.  King, E.G., P.D. Brewer,  andJJ.F. Martin
       1975.  Development of Diatraea saccharalia (Lep. :Pyralidae) at constant
              temperatures.  Entomophaga, 20i 301-306.

52.  King, E.G., D.P. Martin,  and L.R. Miles
       1975.  Advances in rearing of Lixophaga diatraeae  (Dipt.: Tachinidae).
              Entomophaga, 20:307-311.

53.  King,. E.G., G.G. Hartley, D.P. Martin, J.W. Smith, T.E. Summers, and
       R.D. Jackson
       1979.  Production of the Tachinid Lixophaga diatraeae on its natural host,
              the sugarcane borer, and on an unnatural host, the greater wax moth.
              IT.S. Dept. of Agric., SEA, AAT-S-3/April 1979.

54.  Miles, L.R. and E.G. King
       1975.  Development of the Tachinid parasite, Lixophaga diatraeae, on various
              developmental stages of the sugarcane borer in the laboratory.
              Environ. Entomol., 4_s81 1-814.

55.  Pan, Yung-Song and W.H. Long
       1961.  Diets for rearing the sugarcane borer.  Jour. Econ. Entomol.,
                : 257-261.
56.  Wongsiri, T. and N.M. Randolph
       1962.  A comparison of the biology of the sugarcane borer on artificial
              and natural diets.  Jour. Econ. Entomol., 3_5? 472-473*

System #19

No references.

System #20

57.  Brooks, M. and C. Knight
       1982.  A Complete Guide to British Butterflies.  Jonathan Cape, London.
              159 PP.

58.  Singh, P.
       1985.  Multiple-species rearing diets.   In  "Handbook  of Insect Rearing"
              (P. Singh & R.P. Moore, eds.), Vol.  I, pp.  19-44, Elsevier, New
              York, 488 pp.

59.  Williams, C.B.
       1970.  The migration of the painted lady butterfly, Vanessa cardui
              (Nymtjhalidae), with special reference to North America.  J. Lepid.
              Soc/, 24.: 157-1 75.

-------
                      PATHOLOGY-MICROBIOLOGY SUBGROUP
AUTHORS:
        C.Y. Kawanishi

        D.G. Boucias

        P. Bauman

        L. Volkman

        M. Summers
                                    151

-------
                                Draft Report


                      Microbiology-Pathology Subgroup
Members
Dr. C.Y. Kawanishi, Chairman
Developmental Biology Division
Health Effects Research Laboratory
U.S. EPA
Research Triangle Park^NC  27711

Dr. Drion G. Boucias
Dept. of Entomology and Nematology
345 Archer Road Labs.
University of Florida
Gainesvill, FL  32601

Dr. Paul Bauman
Department of Bacteriology
University of California-Davis
Davis, GA  95616

Dr. Loy Volkman
Dept. of EntomO'
338 Hilgard Hall
University of California
Berkeley, CA  94720

Dr. Max Summers
Department of Entomology
Texas A&M University
College Station, TX  77843
Dr. Loy Volkman
Dept. of Entomology and Parasitology
338 Hilgard Hall
lln-i uorci +• v nf ralifnrnis
                                    152

-------
       Pathology - Microbiology Subgroup Critique and Recommendations
     This subgroup was formed to facilitate adaptation of the terrestrial,
freshwater and estuarine enclosed systems to testing microbial pesticides.
This charge was fulfilled through evaluation of the systems and by providing
background information to the other subgroups on the properties, pathology,
taxonomy and ecology of the various groups of agents that are the active
components of microbiaVpesticides (Federal Register, 1984).  The objective
was to ensure, as far as was possible, that the enclosed systems resulting
from the workshop were (1) compatible with the biological, chemical  and
physical properties of the agents, and (2) the endpoints measured in the
systems were appropriate for infectious and toxic living agents.  The
micro-biology-pathology subgroup members participated in the discussions of  the
other subgroups concerned with the design, function and composition of the
enclosed systems.         ;
     The following is a summary of our critique and recommendations.  A
concensus developed among members of the subgroup during the course of the
workshop that a common fault, with most of the enclosed systems was that they
were developed for environmental chemical toxicants and microbial agents
have not been tested with them.  There is concern that the endpoints and
parameters measured in some of them may possibly be inappropriate for
microbial agents or may be too insensitive for the generally milder and
more specific effects of microbial pesticidal agents.  Because of the use
for which they were originally intended, some of the design features and
conditions of the enclosed systems may either be incompatible with or
disadvantageous to the microbial agents because their tolerance limits are
usually narrower than those of chemical toxicants.  Consequently, their
full potential effect may not be realized in the enclosed system.  As an
                                    153

-------
example, during discussions of the freshwater subgroup it was found that
the diurnal variation in pH in the aquatic littoral microcosm can attain
alkalinities in the range which affect viral occlusion bodies (Edgawa and
Summers, 1972; Kawanishi, et al., 1972) and certain bacterial pesticide
protoxin crystals (Cooksey, 1971).  Thus, the effects observed with these
agents in this system may be dependent on when during the diurnal cycle the
pesticidal agent is introduced.  Closer examination of other enclosed
systems may reveal analogous situations which must be circumvented to
effectively utilize them for ecological assessments.
     The following are the recommendations of the committee:  (1) The
compatibility of each enclosed system and the specific properties of the
agent being carefully examined on a case-by-case basis before it is
recommended for testing.  The basis for this recommendation are the following
considerations.  Most systems were originally developed for toxicity testing
                         ., •
and not designed specifically with microbial pesticides in mind.  Additionally,
the subgroup can neither anticipate the diverse types of microbial agents
nor the variety of modes of action to be tested in these systems.  Frequently
pesticidal action is accomplished through infectivity and pathogenicity
(Payne, 1982).  Even where toxicity is the mode of action, both the nature
of the toxins (Wilcox et al., 1986) as well as the mechanisms of action
(Luthy and Ebersold, 1981) appear to be different from most environmental
chemical toxicants.  Additionally, a single microbial pesticide may have
multiple modes of action such as a combination of infectivity and toxicity
and one action may be dependent upon the other (Heimpel and Angus, 1963).
Also, because the systems were designed to test the relatively severe effects
frequently manifested by chemical pesticide toxicity, their utility with
microbial pesticidal agents which may not act through acute or lethal
                                    154

-------
effects but rather through chronic and debilitating action resulting in reduced



vigor and fecundity of the affected species (e.g., Katagiri, 1981)  in



question; (2)  Where possible positive controls should be included;  (3)  The



systems should eventually be validated with microorganisms of known effects.



                                 References





     Cooksey,  K.E.  1971.  The protein crystal toxin of Bacillus thuringiensis:



biochemistry and mode of action, p.247-274.  In H.D. Surges and H.W. Hussey



(ed.), Microbial Control  of Insects and Mites.  Academic Presss, Inc.,  New York.



     Egawa, K. and Summers, M.D.  1972.  Solubilization of Trichoplusia ni



granulosis virus proteinic crystal I.  Kinetics. J. Invertebr. Pathol.  19,



395-404.



     Fereral Register.  1984.  Data Requirements for Pesticide Registration.



Vol. 49, 42856-42905.



     Heimpel,  A.M. and Arvgtis, T.A.  1963.  Diseases caused by sporeforming



bacteria, p.42.  In Steinhaus, E.A. (ed.), Insect Pathology - An Advanced



Treatise.  Academic Press, New York and London.



     Katagiri, K.  1981.  Pest control by cytoplasmic polyhedrosis  viruses,



p. 433-440.   In Surges, H.D. (ed.), Microbial  Control of Pests and  Plant



Diseases 1970-1980.  Academic Press, London, New York, Toronto, Sidney,



San Francisco.



     Kawanishi, C.Y. Egawa, K. and Summers, M.D.  1972.  Solubilization of



Trichoplusia ni granulosis virus proteinic crystal II.  Ultrastructure.  J.



Invertebr. Pathol. 20, 95-100.



     Luthy, P. and Ebersold, H.R.  1981.  Bacillus thuringiensis delta-endotoxin:



Histopathology and molecular mode of action, p. 235-267.  In E.W. Davidson



(ed.), Pathogenesis of Invertebrate Microbial  Diseases.  Allanheld, Osmun &



Co. Publishers, Inc.





                                    155

-------
     Payne, C.C.  1982.  Insect viruses as control  agents.   Parasitol. 84,



35-77.



     Wilcox, D.R., Shivakumar, A.G., Mel in, B.E., Miller,  M.F.,  Benson,



T.A., Schopp, C.W., Casuto, D., Gundling, G.J., Boiling,  T.J.,  Spear, B.B.



and Fox, J.L.  1986.   Genetic Engineering of Bio-Insecticides.   In  Protein



Engineering:  Applications in Science,  Industry and Medicine (In press).
                                     156

-------
             WORKSHOP PARTICIPANTS AND THEIR AREAS OF EXPERTISE
NAME

Dick Anderson
Paul Baumann
Drion B. Boucias
John A. Couch
Tom Duke
Lowell Etzel
Steven Foss
Paul Franco
Larry Goodman
Fred Genthner
ADDRESS & AFFILIATION

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
6201 Congdon Boulevard
Dulyth, Minnesota  55804

Department of Bacteriology
University of California-Davis
Davis, California  95616

Department of Entomology & Nematology
345 Archer Road Laboratory
University of Gainesville
Gainesville, Florida  32601

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561

U.S. .Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561

Division of Biological Control
University of California
1050 San Pablo Avenue
Albany, California  94706

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561

Oakridge National Laboratory
Environmental Science Division
Building 1504, P.O. Box X
Oakridge, Tennessee  55812

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island, Gulf Breeze, FL  32561
AREA OF EXPERTISE

Freshwater Systems,
Entomology
Bacterial  Pathogens
Fungal  Pathogens of
Insects
Virology, Invertebrate
and Fish Pathology
Aquatic Ecology
Biological  Control
Estuarine Biology
Freshwater Biology
Estuarine Toxicology
Microbiology,
Biotechnology
                                    157

-------
Clint Kawanishi
Gary Phipps
Ken Perez
Lyle Shannon
Ray Seidler
Max Summers
Pete Van Voris
Loy Volkman
                    ADORES & AFFILIATION
Environmental Science Section, HAEL
Eastman Kodak Company
Kodak Park Building 306
Rochester, New York  14650

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Health Effects Research Laboratory
Research Triangle Park, NC  27711

U.S_, Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
6201 Congdon Boulevard
Duluth, Minnesota  55804

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
South Ferry Road
Narragansett, Rhode Island  02882

Department of Biology
University of Minnesota
Duluth, Minnesota  55812

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
200 SW 35th Street
Corvallis, OR  97333

Department of Entomology
Texas A&M University
College Station,  TX  77843

Battelle Memorial Laboratories
Pacific Northwest Laboratory
Richland, Washington  99352
                                         EXPERTISE
                                                             Environmental Sciences
Microbiology,
Biotechnology
Aquatic Biology
Aquatic Ecology
Biology
Microbiology,
Biotechnology
Virology &
Biotechnology
Terrestrial
Envi ronments
Ecology
                                                                          and
Department of Entomology & Parasitology  Virology and
338 Hilgard  Hall                         Immunoassay
University of California
Berkeley, California  94720
                                     158

-------